Panasonic KX-TA308 Installation manual

Advanced Hybrid System
Installation Manual
MODEL
KX-TA308
Please read this manual before connecting the Advanced Hybrid System.
2
System Highlights
System Capacity
Basic System
Expansion
Extensions
Outside (CO) lines
Maximum extensions
Maximum outside (CO) lines
Special System Points
System Expansion
This system can expand the outside (CO) lines and extension capacity by installing an optional card.
☞
2– 24
8
3
24
6
Direct Backup Power Supply
Car batteries can be connected directly to this system as a backup power supply in the event of a power failure. To supply backup power, optional cables are required.
☞
2– 23
Hybrid
This system can accept Panasonic analog proprietary telephones. Also, single line devices such as single line telephones, facsimiles and data terminals can be connected.
Calling from the outside
(Direct Inward System Access)
External callers can call extensions in the system. If you install an optional card, an outgoing message will greet the caller and give information about how to access an extension.
☞
3– 13
Precautions
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such as fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the performance of the Advanced Hybrid System.
• This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40˚C / 104˚F) and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into the vents or other holes of this unit.
• If there is any trouble, disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Plug the telephone directly into the telephone line. If the telephone operates properly, do not reconnect the unit to the line until the trouble has been repaired. If the telephone does not operate properly, chances are that the trouble is in the telephone system, and not in the unit.
• Do not use benzine, thinner, or the like, or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.
WARNING
THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVED BY QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS
BECOMING ACCESSIBLE, DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD
IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.
DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE
POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT, AND
RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.
THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG. FOR SAFETY
REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING
CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO
REGULATIONS.
THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAIN DISCONNECT DEVICE,
ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET-OUTLET IS LOCATED/INSTALLED NEAR THE
EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE.
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
3
4
Precautions
For your future reference
SERIAL NO.
(found on the bottom of the unit)
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER’S ADDRESS
DATE OF PURCHASE
Note • This Installation Manual does not show complete model number that indicate the country where your models should be used. The model number of your unit is found on the label affixed to the unit.
MODEL NO. – – – – – – – –
(label)
Introduction
Structure of the Manual
This manual consists of the following sections:
Section 1. Basic System Construction
Provides general information on the system including connection diagrams.
Section 2. Installation
Contains the system installation and wiring instructions, as well as how to install the optional cards.
Section 3. Features
Describes the optional and programmable features in alphabetical order. It also provides information about the conditions, required System Programming, connection references, related features and operating instructions references for every feature.
Section 4. System Programming
Describes the steps required to assign features to extensions or to the system.
Section 5. Appendix
Provides specifications and the default values of the System Programming.
Section 6. Troubleshooting
Provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting.
Section 7. Programming Tables
Provides programming tables for user-programmed data.
Description of the Symbols Mainly Used in this manual
!
!
☞
Additional information and conditions.
The feature or program references.
5
6
Contents
Section 1 Basic System Construction
Section 2 Installation
2.1
Before Installation .................................................................................
2-2
2.2
Unpacking ..............................................................................................
2-4
2.3
Names and Locations ............................................................................
2-4
2.4
Wall Mounting .......................................................................................
2-5
2.5
Frame Ground Connection ..................................................................
2-6
2.6
Opening the Top Front Cover ..............................................................
2-6
2.7
Outside (CO) Line Connection ............................................................
2-7
2.8
Extension Connection ...........................................................................
2-9
2.9
External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection...............................
2-10
2.10 External Music Connection ..................................................................
2-11
2.11 Paralleled Telephone Connection.........................................................
2-12
2.12 Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection ............................................
2-13
2.13 Printer and PC Connection..................................................................
2-14
2.14 Location of Optional Cards..................................................................
2-17
2.15 OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation ..............................................
2-17
2.16 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection ..........................................
2-19
2.17 Backup Batteries Connection...............................................................
2-23
2.18 Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA30877) and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA30874) .............................
2-24
2.19 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer .............................
2-29
2.20 Securing the Cords................................................................................
2-29
2.21 Closing the Front Cover .......................................................................
2-30
2.22 Starting the System for the First Time ...............................................
2-31
2.23 System Restart .......................................................................................
2-32
2.24 System Data Clear.................................................................................
2-33
Section 3 Features
A
Absent Message Capability ................................................................
3-2
Account Code Entry ...........................................................................
3-2
Alternate Calling – Ring/Voice (Voice to Ring only) ........................
3-3
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) ...............................................
3-3
Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access Number..................................
3-4
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) .....................................................
3-4
B
Busy Station Signaling (BSS) ............................................................
3-6
C
Call Forwarding ..................................................................................
3-7
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection ..................................
3-8
Call Park .............................................................................................
3-8
Call Pickup .........................................................................................
3-9
Call Splitting.......................................................................................
3-9
Call Transfer – to Extension...............................................................
3-10
Call Transfer – to Outside (CO) Line ................................................
3-10
Contents
C
Call Waiting ........................................................................................
3-11
Conference (3-Party) ..........................................................................
3-12
Conference (5-Party) ..........................................................................
3-13
D
Data Line Security..............................................................................
3-13
Date and Time Setting ........................................................................
3-14
Direct In Line (DIL) ...........................................................................
3-14
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)................................................
3-15
Display Contrast Adjustment (KX-T7330 only) ................................
3-22
Distinctive Dial Tones ........................................................................
3-22
Do Not Disturb (DND).......................................................................
3-23
Door Opener .......................................................................................
3-23
Doorphone Call ..................................................................................
3-24
DSS Console.......................................................................................
3-25
E
Emergency Call ..................................................................................
3-25
Executive Busy Override....................................................................
3-26
Extension Button Confirmation (KX-T7330 only) ............................
3-26
Extension Group.................................................................................
3-27
Extension Password / System Password ............................................
3-27
External Feature Access .....................................................................
3-28
F
Flash/Recall ........................................................................................
3-28
Flexible Buttons..................................................................................
3-29
H
Handset/Headset Selection (KX-T7330 only)....................................
3-30
Handsfree Answerback .......................................................................
3-30
Handsfree Operation...........................................................................
3-30
Hold .................................................................................................
3-31
Hookswitch Flash ...............................................................................
3-32
Host PBX Access................................................................................
3-32
I
Intercept Routing ................................................................................
3-33
Intercom Calling.................................................................................
3-33
L
Language Selection ............................................................................
3-34
Limited Call Duration ........................................................................
3-34
Line Access Buttons ...........................................................................
3-35
Log-In/Log-Out ..................................................................................
3-36
M
Message Waiting.................................................................................
3-36
Microphone Mute ...............................................................................
3-37
Music on Hold / Background Music (BGM) .....................................
3-37
O
One-Touch Dialing .............................................................................
3-37
Operator / Manager Extension ...........................................................
3-38
Operator Call ......................................................................................
3-38
Outgoing Message (OGM) .................................................................
3-39
Outside Calling...................................................................................
3-42
Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection ................................................
3-43
7
8
Contents
P
Paging .................................................................................................
3-43
Paralleled Telephone Connection .......................................................
3-44
Personal Speed Dialing ......................................................................
3-44
Pickup Dialing ....................................................................................
3-45
Polarity Reverse Detection .................................................................
3-45
Power Failure Transfer .......................................................................
3-46
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming ...........................................
3-46
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing............................................
3-47
Proprietary Telephone setting Data Default Set .................................
3-47
Pulse to Tone Conversion ...................................................................
3-48
R
Receiving Calls...................................................................................
3-48
Redial .................................................................................................
3-48
Ringing Pattern Selection ...................................................................
3-49
Room Monitor ....................................................................................
3-50
S
Secret Dialing .....................................................................................
3-50
Self-Extension Number Confirmation (KX-T7330 only) ..................
3-51
Station Feature Clear ..........................................................................
3-51
Station Hunting...................................................................................
3-52
Station Lock........................................................................................
3-53
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ......................................
3-54
System Data Default Set ....................................................................
3-55
System Speed Dialing ........................................................................
3-56
T
Timed Reminder .................................................................................
3-56
Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service.......................................................
3-57
Toll Restriction ...................................................................................
3-58
Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing.........................................
3-60
Toll Restriction Override by Account Codes .....................................
3-61
Toll Restriction – Station Lock Boundary Class................................
3-62
U
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) ......................................................
3-62
V
Voice Mail Integration ........................................................................
3-66
Volume Control ..................................................................................
3-69
W
Walking COS ......................................................................................
3-69
Section 4 System Programming
4.1
Before System Programming ...............................................................
4-2
4.2
System Programming............................................................................
4-5
[000] Date and Time Setting.............................................................
4-5
[001] System Speed Dialing Entry ...................................................
4-5
[002] System Password.....................................................................
4-6
[003] DSS Console Port Assignment................................................
4-7
[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console ....................
4-7
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button .............................
4-8
Contents
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode ...............
4-8
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time ........................
4-9
[008] Operator Assignment ..............................................................
4-10
[009] Extension Number Assignment ..............................................
4-10
[010] LCD Time Display Selection .................................................
4-11
[011] System Speed Dialing Name Setting .....................................
4-12
[100] Hunting Group Set .................................................................
4-14
[101] Hunting Type ..........................................................................
4-14
[102] Voice Mail Port ......................................................................
4-15
[103] DTMF Integration ..................................................................
4-15
[104] Hold Mode Selection .............................................................
4-17
[105] Conference Tone ....................................................................
4-17
[106] External Paging Access Tone .................................................
4-18
[107] DTMF Receiver Check ..........................................................
4-18
[108] Flash Mode for a Station Locked Extension .........................
4-18
[109] CO Indicator Assignment .......................................................
4-19
[110] Flash Key Mode .....................................................................
4-19
[111] Hold Music Selection .............................................................
4-20
[112] DSS Console Indication Mode ..............................................
4-20
[113] Automatic Redial Repeat .......................................................
4-21
[114] Automatic Redial Interval Time .............................................
4-21
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection .....................................
4-22
[116] Conference Pattern Selection .................................................
4-22
[117] Call Pickup Tone ....................................................................
4-23
[118] Pulse Restriction ....................................................................
4-23
[119] Redialing after Pulse to Tone Conversion ..............................
4-23
[120] Bell Frequency .......................................................................
4-24
[121] Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access Number Selection .....
4-24
[122] Automatic Rotation for Outside (CO) Line Access ...............
4-24
[123] Break Ratio ...........................................................................
4-25
[124] SLT Ringing Mode Selection .................................................
4-25
[125] Toll Restriction Check for and # .......................................
4-25
[126] DSS Off-Hook Mode ..............................................................
4-26
[127] Pickup Group Set ....................................................................
4-26
[200] Hold Recall Time ...................................................................
4-27
[201] Transfer Recall Time ..............................................................
4-27
[202] Call Forwarding Start Time ...................................................
4-27
[203] Pickup Dial Delay Time .........................................................
4-28
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time .............................................
4-28
[205] Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Duration Time Limit .....
4-29
[206] Dialing Start Time ..................................................................
4-29
[207] Hookswitch Flash Timing Range Selection ...........................
4-30
[208] Interdigit Time ........................................................................
4-30
9
10
Contents
[210] DTMF Time ...........................................................................
4-31
[211] No Dial Disconnection ...........................................................
4-31
[212] Outside (CO) Line Duration Time Limit ...............................
4-32
[213] Bell Off Detection ..................................................................
4-32
[300] Carrier Excepted Code Assignment .......................................
4-33
[301] Toll Restriction — System Speed Dialing Boundary Class ..
4-33
[302]–[305] Toll Restriction — Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes ..
4-34
[306] Toll Restriction — Exception Codes .....................................
4-35
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set .................................................
4-35
[310] Account Codes .......................................................................
4-36
[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes ..........................................
4-36
[312] Toll Restriction — Station Lock Boundary Class .................
4-37
[350] ARS Selection .........................................................................
4-38
[351]-[354] Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)...
4-38
[355]-[358] Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes .............................
4-39
[359] 1st Carrier Selection Code ......................................................
4-39
[360] ARS Modification — Removed Digits...................................
4-40
[361] ARS Modification — Added Number ....................................
4-40
[362] ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection............................................
4-41
[363] ARS Interdigit Time................................................................
4-41
[400] Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment ..........................
4-42
[401] Dial Mode ..............................................................................
4-42
[402] Pulse Speed Selection ............................................................
4-43
[403] Host PBX Access Codes ........................................................
4-43
[404] Outside (CO) Line Group Assignment ..................................
4-44
[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch ......................................................................
4-45
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch ....
4-46
[411]–[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch ....
4-47
[414]–[416] Outside (CO) Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch ...........
4-48
[417] Pause Time .............................................................................
4-49
[418] Flash Time ..............................................................................
4-50
[419] Automatic Designated Outside (CO) Line Access ................
4-50
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal ......................................
4-51
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls ........................................
4-52
[422] Disconnect Time ....................................................................
4-52
[423] Outside (CO) Line Ringing Pattern Selection .......................
4-53
[424] Reverse (Polarity) Circuit Assignment ..................................
4-54
[500] DISA Incoming Dialing Mode Selection ..............................
4-55
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant ...............................................
4-56
[502] OGM Mode Selection ............................................................
4-57
[503] FAX Connection ....................................................................
4-58
Contents
[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time .................................................
4-58
[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM .............................................
4-58
[506] DISA Busy Mode ...................................................................
4-59
[507] DISA Intercept Mode .............................................................
4-59
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept ....................................
4-60
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept .......................................
4-60
[510] DISA No Dial Mode ..............................................................
4-61
[511] DISA Security Type ................................................................
4-61
[512] DISA Security Codes .............................................................
4-62
[513] Cyclic Tone Detection ............................................................
4-62
[514] Fax Tone Detection ................................................................
4-63
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA ..........................................
4-63
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment ..................................................
4-64
[517] DISA AA Wait Time ..............................................................
4-64
[518] DISA Tone Selection after the Security Code ........................
4-65
[519] DISA OGM Mute Time .........................................................
4-65
[520] UCD Group ............................................................................
4-66
[521] UCD Busy Waiting Time .......................................................
4-66
[522] UCD OGM Message Interval Time .......................................
4-66
[523] UCD Busy Mode ....................................................................
4-67
[524] UCD Intercept Mode ..............................................................
4-67
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept .....................................
4-68
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept ........................................
4-68
[600] Extension Group Assignment ................................................
4-69
[601]–[603] TRS – Class of Service Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch ......................................................................
4-69
[604] Extension Name Setting .........................................................
4-70
[605] Account Code Entry Mode ....................................................
4-71
[606] Call Transfer to an Outside (CO) Line ..................................
4-72
[607] Call Forwarding to an Outside (CO) Line .............................
4-72
[608] Executive Busy Override .......................................................
4-73
[609] Do Not Disturb Override .......................................................
4-73
[610] Paralleled Telephone Connection ...........................................
4-74
[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine) Extension ................
4-74
[612] Room Monitor Assignment ....................................................
4-75
[613] Outside (CO) Line Duration Time Limit Selection ...............
4-75
[614] Internal Pulse Detection .........................................................
4-76
[615] LCD Language Assignment ...................................................
4-77
[700]–[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch ..
4-78
[703]–[705] Door Opener Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch ..........
4-79
[706] Doorphone Ringing / Tone Pattern Selection ........................
4-80
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection .........................................
4-80
11
12
Contents
[708] Doorphone Ringing Time ......................................................
4-81
[709] Door Opener Time .................................................................
4-81
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters .......................
4-82
[801] SMDR Parameter ...................................................................
4-83
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing .....................
4-83
[803] Secret Speed Dialing / One-Touch Dialing Printing .............
4-84
[804] System Data Dump ................................................................
4-84
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection ............................................
4-85
[806] SMDR Language Assignment ................................................
4-86
[998] ROM Version ..........................................................................
4-86
[999] System Data Clear ..................................................................
4-87
Section 5 Appendix
5.1
Default Values ........................................................................................
5-2
5.2
Specifications .........................................................................................
5-7
Section 6 Troubleshooting
6.1
While Installing ....................................................................................
6-2
6.2
While Connecting ..................................................................................
6-3
6.3
While Operating ....................................................................................
6-4
Section 7 Programming Tables
Template
Section 1
Basic System Construction
1 Basic System Construction
The system has a basic capacity of 8 extensions and 3 outside (CO) lines. It is capable of supporting Panasonic analog proprietary telephones, and single line devices such as single line telephones, facsimiles and data terminals.
To expand its capabilities, the system can be equipped with optional components or customer-supplied peripherals such as an external speaker, external music source (e.g. a radio) and door opener.
System Connection Diagram
car batteries
Printer or Computer
(one pair)
6 Outside (CO) Lines to outside lines 1 – 3 (initial) to outside lines 4 – 6 (additional)
(Lightning Protectors)
External Music Source
24 Extensions
Amplifier Speaker
Extension jacks 01 – 08 (initial)
Extension jacks 09 – 24 (additional)
Single Line Telephone
(one pair)
(two pair)
KX-T7300 series
(This illustration is a
KX-T7330.)
(two pair)
KX-T7340
Door Openers
Data Terminal
(one pair)
Panasonic
Cordless Phone
(one pair)
Panasonic
Panasonic
Telephone Answering Machine with Facsimile
(one pair)
1-2
Panasonic
Doorphones
KX-T30865
Voice Processing System
Basic System Construction
: needs optional card.
1 Basic System Construction
!
!
• We recommend connecting a display proprietary telephone at extension jack 01.
• Parallel connection of telephone is possible. (☞ 2.11, Paralleled Telephone Connection)
• A proprietary telephone cannot be connected to extension jacks 17 through 24. Only a
single line telephone (SLT) can be connected.
Basic System Construction
1-3
1-4
Basic System Construction
Section 2
Installation
2.1
Before Installation
Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the system and terminal equipment.
Safety Installation Instructions
When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for
wet locations.
3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Installation Precautions
This system is designed for wall mounting only. Avoid installing in the following places.
(Doing so may result in malfunction, noise, or discoloration.)
1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature range: 0°C – 40°C /
32°F – 104°F)
2. Sulfuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs, etc. may damage the
equipment or contacts.
3. Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.
4. Dusty places, or places where water or oil may come into contact with the system.
5. Near high-frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders.
6. On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or
air conditioners. (It is preferable not to install the system in the same room with the above equipment.)
7. Install at least 1.8 m (6 feet) away from radios and televisions. (Both the system and
Panasonic proprietary telephones)
8. Do not obstruct area around the system (for reasons of maintenance and inspection — be
especially careful to allow space for cooling above and at the sides of the system).
Wiring Precautions
Be sure to follow these instructions when wiring the unit:
1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source, computer, telex, etc.
If the cables are run near those wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground the shields.
2. If cables are run on the floor, use protectors to prevent the wires from being stepped on.
Avoid wiring under carpets.
3. Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers, telexes, and other office
equipment. Otherwise, the system operation may be interrupted by the induction noise from such equipment.
2-2
Installation
2.1
Before Installation
4. Please use one pair telephone wire for extension connection of (telephone) equipment such as single line telephones, data terminals, answering machines, computers, voice processing systems, etc., except Panasonic proprietary telephones (e.g. KX-T7330).
5. Unplug the system during wiring. After all of the wiring is completed, plug in the system.
6. Mis-wiring may cause the system to operate improperly. Refer to Section 6.1 “While
Installing” and Section 6.2 “While Connecting”.
7. If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the telephone from the extension line and then connect again, or turn off the Power Switch of the system and then on again.
8. The system is equipped with a 3-wire grounding type plug. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding-type plug.
9. Outside (CO) lines should be installed with lightning protectors. For details, refer to
Section 2.7 “Outside (CO) Line Connection”, Installing Lightning Protectors.
Side View
Warning:
Static sensitive devices are used. To protect printed circuit boards from static electricity, do not touch connectors indicated to the left. To discharge body static, touch ground or wear a grounding strap.
Warning: Static sensitive connectors
Installation
2-3
2.2
Unpacking
Unpack the box and check the items below.
Main Unit
AC Cord
Screws (Wall Mounting)
Washers (Wall Mounting)
3
3
1
1
Pager Connector
Music Source Connector
Strap
Rivet
1
1
1
1
2.3
Names and Locations
External Music Jack
Paging Jack
Extension Modular Jacks
Outside (CO) Line Modular Jacks
Strap Hole
Power Switch
Battery Interface
Protective Earth Terminal
AC Inlet
Power Indicator
Side View
Serial Interface
Connector
(RS-232C)
2-4
Installation
2.4
Wall Mounting
This set is designed for wall mounting only. The wall where the main unit is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of the main unit. If screws other than the ones supplied are used, use screws with the same diameter as the ones enclosed.
Mounting on a Wooden Wall
1. Place the template (on the last page) on the wall to mark the screw positions.
Template
Mounting on a Concrete or Mortar
Wall
1. Place the template (on the last page) on the wall to mark the screw positions.
2. Drill holes and drive the anchor plugs (usersupplied) with a hammer, flush to the wall.
To the wall surface
Anchor Plug
Concrete Wall
6.4 mm
(1/4 inch)
29 mm
(1 1/8 inch)
2. Install the screws (included) into the wall.
Wooden
Wall
3. Install the screws (included) into the anchor plugs.
Drive the screw to this position
Drive the screw to this position
3. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.
4. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.
Installation
2-5
2.5
Frame Ground Connection
IMPORTANT!!!
Connect the frame of the main unit to the ground.
1. Loosen the screw.
2. Insert the grounding wire
(user-supplied).
3. Tighten the screw.
4. Connect the grounding wire to the ground.
To the ground
Screw
2.6
Opening the Top Front Cover
1. Loosen the screw.
2. Remove the top front cover.
Screw
Top front cover
!
!
• The screw cannot be removed from the cover.
2-6
Installation
2.7
Outside (CO) Line Connection
Connection
1. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2-conductor wiring) into the modular jacks (CO 1 through 3) on the system.
2. Connect the line cords to the terminal board or the modular jacks from the Central Office.
View of TEL Jack (Outside (CO) Line)
T: Tip
R: Ring
T R
To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office
Installing Lightning Protectors
A lightning protector is a device to be installed on an outside (CO) line to prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging the equipment.
A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line.
Problems due to lightning surges have been steadily increasing with the development of electronic equipment.
In many countries, there are regulations requiring the installation of a lightning protector. A lightning strike to a telephone cable which is 10 m (33 feet) above ground can be as high as
200,000 volts.
This system should be installed with lightning protectors. In addition, grounding
(connection to earth ground) is very important to protect the system (
☞ 2.5, Frame Ground
Connection).
Recommended lightning protectors
• TELESPIKE BLOK MODEL TSB (TRIPPE MFG. CO.)
• SPIKE BLOK MODEL SK6-0 (TRIPPE MFG. CO.)
• Super MAX™ (PANAMAX)
• MP1 (ITW LINK)
Installation
2-7
2.7
Installation
Outside (CO) Line Connection
CO
Lightning
Protectors
CO
Terminal
Board
CO
EXTN
System
Protective
Earth
Terminal
EXTN
TEL
EXTN
TEL
Frame Ground
Ground
CO: Outside line
EXTN: Extension line
TEL: Telephone
Installation of an Earth Rod
Lightning
Protectors
CO
Grounding Wire
System
(Underground)
Rod
1) Installation location of the earth rod . . . . . . Near the protector
2) Check obstructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None
3) Composition of the earth rod . . . . . . . . . . . Metal
4) Depth of the earth rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More than 50 cm (20 inches)
5) Size of the grounding wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thickness more than 16 AWG
Note • The above example is only a recommendation.
• The length of the earth rod and required depth depend on the composition of the soil.
2-8
Installation
2.8
Extension Connection
Extension jacks 01 through 08 can be used for all kinds of telephones.
Telephone Wiring
The maximum length of the extension line cord (twisted cable) which connects the system and the extension is as follows.
Single Line Telephone
(Station Loop Limit:
600 ohms including set)
Diameter of the line
22AWG
24AWG
26AWG
Max. length
1798m (5900 feet)
1128m (3700 feet)
698m (2290 feet)
Proprietary Telephone
(Station Loop Limit:
40 ohms)
22AWG
24AWG
26AWG
360m (1180 feet)
229m (750 feet)
140m (460 feet)
2 or 4-conductor wiring is required for each extension as listed below. There are 4 pins possible for connection: “T” (Tip), “R” (Ring), “L” (Low) and “H” (High).
Telephone
Single line telephones
Proprietary telephone
(e.g., KX-T7330)
Wiring
1 pair wire (T, R)
2 pair wire (L, H, T, R)
!
!
Connection
• If a telephone or answering machine with an A-A1 relay is connected to the system, set the
A-A1 relay switch on the telephone or answering machine to the OFF position.
Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2 or 4-conductor wiring) into the modular jacks (JACK 01 through 08) on the system.
View of TEL Jack (Extension)
H: High
T: Tip
R: Ring
L: Low
To extensions
!
!
• System extensions must be located within the same building as the KX-TA308AL.
Installation
2-9
2.9
External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
One external pager (user-supplied) can be connected to the system as illustrated below.
Use an EIAJ RC-6701 A plug (2-conductor, ø 3.5 mm in diameter).
• Output impedance: 600
Ω
Maximum length of the cable
AWG 18 – 22: Under 10 m (33 feet)
Paging Jack
POWER
PAGING
Speaker
Amplifier
Paging Equipment
!
!
• To adjust the sound level of the pager, use the volume control on the amplifier.
• Paging jack is a SELV port and should only connect approved SELV device or connect
via a Line Isolation Unit with a Telecommunications Compliance Label.
☞
• Required System Programming
Section 4.2, System Programming
[106] External Paging Access Tone
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Paging
2-10
Installation
2.10
External Music Connection
One music source, such as a radio (user-supplied), can be connected to the system as illustrated below.
Insert the plug to the earphone/headphone jack on the external music source.
Use an EIAJ RC-6701 A plug (2-conductor, ø 3.5mm in diameter).
• Input impedance: 8
Ω
Maximum length of the cable
AWG 18 – 22: Under 10 m (33 feet)
External Music Jack
POWER
EXT.
MUSIC
External Music source
!
!
• System programming for the music sources used for Music on Hold and Background
Music (BGM) is required.
• To adjust the sound level of the Music on Hold, use the volume control on the external music source.
• External Music jack is a SELV port and should only connect to approved SELV device or connect via a Line Isolation Unit with a Telecommunications Compliance Label.
☞
• Required System Programming
Section 4.2, System Programming
[111] Hold Music Selection
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Music on Hold / Background Music (BGM)
Installation
2-11
2.11
Paralleled Telephone Connection
Any single line telephone can be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone as follows.
Using a Modular T-Adaptor
Modular T-Adaptor
(Panasonic KX-J66 or USOC RJA2X)
4-conductor wiring cord
For a proprietary telephone:
Connect pins “T”, “R”, “H” and “L”.
2-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins “T” and “R”.
Proprietary Telephone Single Line Telephone
☞
• Required System Programming
Section 4.2, System Programming
[610] Paralleled Telephone Connection
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Paralleled Telephone Connection
2-12
Installation
2.12
Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection
If your telephone is polarity sensitive, follow the procedure below:
1. Complete all the required extension wiring.
Outside (CO) Line
2. Confirm that dialing can be done from all the
extensions using a touch-tone telephone.
If dialing fails, the polarity between the extension and the system must be reversed.
3. Reverse as shown.
Extension
1
4
7 8
0
2
5
3
6
9
4. Unplug the system.
5. Connect all outside lines.
Reverse here
Outside (CO) Line
6. Confirm that dialing can be done on the following
extension using a touch-tone telephone.
Extension (T, R) of jack 01: Outside (CO) line 1
If dialing fails, the polarity between the system and the outside line must be reversed.
7. Reverse as shown.
Extension
1
4
7 8
0
2
5
3
6
9
8. Every time an extension telephone is replaced,
repeat the procedure above.
Reverse here
Installation
2-13
2.13
Printer and PC Connection
A user-supplied printer or personal computer (PC) can be connected to the system. These are used to print out or refer to the SMDR call records and system programming data.
Connect the printer cable or the PC cable to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) connector. The cable must be shielded and the maximum length is 2 m (6.5 feet).
Serial Interface
(RS-232C) (D-SUB, 9-pin)
Printer or Computer
Arrange the cables so that the printer will be connected to the system as shown in the appropriate chart on the following page.
The pin configuration of the Serial Interface (RS-232C) Connector is as follows.
Signal Name Pin
No.
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
Received Data
Transmitted Data
Data Terminal Ready
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Circuit Type
AB
CC
CA
CB
EIA CCITT
BB 104
BA
CD
103
108.2
102
107
105
106
2-14
Installation
2.13
Printer and PC Connection
Connection Chart for a Printer / Personal Computer with the System
If you connect a printer or a PC with a 9-pin cable, follow the chart below.
Circuit type
(EIA)
BB
BA
CD
AB
CC
CA
CB
System
Signal name
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
7
8
5
6
Pin no.
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
Pin no.
2
3
4
9-pin Cable Printer/PC
Signal name
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
Circuit type
(EIA)
BB
BA
CD
AB
CC
CA
CB
If you connect a printer or a PC with a 25-pin cable, follow the chart below.
Circuit type
(EIA)
BB
BA
CD
AB
CC
CA
CB
System
Signal name
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
7
8
5
6
Pin no.
2
3
4
25-pin Cable Printer/PC
5
6
20
7
8
Pin no.
1
Signal name
FG
3 RXD
2 TXD
DTR
SG
CTS
DSR
DCD
Circuit type
(EIA)
AA
BB
BA
CD
AB
CB
CC
CF
Installation
2-15
2.13
Printer and PC Connection
Serial Interface (RS-232C) Signals
Frame Ground: FG
Connects the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord.
Transmitted Data: SD (TXD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (output)
Conveys signals from the unit to the printer. A “Mark” condition is held unless data or
BREAK signals are being transmitted.
Received Data: RD (RXD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (input)
Conveys signals from the printer.
Request to Send: RS (RTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (output)
This lead remains ON whenever DR (DSR) is ON.
Clear To Send: CS (CTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (input)
When the CS (CTS) circuit is ON, it indicates that the printer is ready to receive data from the unit. The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data when the CS (CTS) circuit is OFF.
Data Set Ready: DR (DSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (input)
When the DR (DSR) circuit is ON, it indicates the printer is ready. The DR (DSR) circuit being ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer.
Signal Ground: SG
Connects the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.
Data Terminal Ready: ER (DTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (output)
This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate that it is ON
LINE. The ER (DTR) circuit being ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer. It is switched OFF when the unit is OFF LINE.
Data Carrier Detect: CD (DCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (input)
When ON, it indicates the data terminal (DTE) that the carrier signal is being received.
☞
• Required System Programming
Section 4.2, System Programming
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters
[801] SMDR Parameter
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2-16
Installation
2.14
Location of Optional Cards
The location of the optional cards is shown below.
Precaution
To protect the printed circuit boards (P-boards) from static electricity, do not touch parts on the P-boards in the main unit and on the optional cards. If accessing the parts is required, wear a grounding strap.
3-CO Line and 8 Ext
Expansion Card
(KX-TA30877) or
8 SLT Extension Expansion
Card (KX-TA30874)
Connector
Doorphone/Door Opener Card
(KX-TA30860) Connector
The front covers are open.
OGM/Fax Detection Card (KX-TA30891) Connector
NOTE:
Power off the system, and unplug the AC cord before installing an optional card.
2.15
OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation
An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card (KX-TA30891) can be installed to the system.
The OGM/FAX Detection Card supports the following.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) with OGM:
One of the system features. An outgoing message greets the external caller and gives information so that the caller can access an extension(s) directly.
Facsimile detection:
When the system receives a facsimile transmission signal by DISA, it automatically connects the specified facsimile extension.
1. Remove the 2 screws.
Screws
Installation
2-17
2.15
OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation
2. Open the bottom front cover.
Bottom front cover
3. Attach the OGM/FAX Detection card.
OGM/FAX Detection Card
(KX-TA30891)
Note
Please do not damage this part.
4. Insert the flat cables to the card connector.
Flat cables
5. Close the cover.
☞
• Required System Programming
See ‘Required System Programming’ in Section 3, Features “Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)”
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Outgoing Message (OGM)
2-18
Installation
2.16
Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
Four doorphones (KX-T30865) and 4 door openers (user-supplied) can be installed.
Maximum cable length
The maximum length of the doorphone and door opener line cord which connects the system is as follows.
Doorphone
(Station Loop Limit:
20 ohms)
Diameter of the line
22AWG
24AWG
26AWG
Max. length
180m (590 feet)
113m (370 feet)
70m (230 feet)
Door Opener
22AWG 180m (590 feet)
Installing the Doorphone
1. Loosen the screw to open the doorphone unit.
Panasonic
Screw
Screws
2. Attach the base cover to a wall using 2 screws.
Note Two kinds of screws are included. Please choose the appropriate one depending on your type of wall.
Type 1: When a doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall.
Type 2: When you wish to install the doorphone directly to the wall.
3. Connect the wires to the screws located in the front cover.
To the terminal box
4. Put the doorphone together and re-install the screw.
Installation
2-19
2.16
Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
Doorphone/Door Opener Installation
Attach the optional Doorphone/Door Opener Card to the main unit, connect the cord to the
Doorphone/Door Opener Card Connector and secure the screw.
Screw
Doorphone/Door Opener Card
(KX-TA30860)
Doorphone Connectors
Door Opener Terminal
Doorphone/Door Opener Card
Card Connector
2-20
Installation
2.16
Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
Wiring of the Doorphone
1. Connect the Doorphone/Door Opener Card to the terminal boxes using 4-conductor modular connectors.
2. Connect the wires of doorphones 1 and 3 to the red and green screws on the terminal box.
3. Connect the wires of doorphones 2 and 4 to the yellow and black screws on the terminal box.
View of Doorphone Connector Jack
Doorphone 2
Doorphone 1
Doorphone 4
Doorphone 3
4-conductor wiring is required.
Panasonic
Doorphone 1
(KX-T30865)
Yellow
Red
4-conductor wiring is required.
Panasonic
Doorphone 3
(KX-T30865)
Yellow
Red
Black
Green
Panasonic
Doorphone 2
(KX-T30865)
Black
Green
Panasonic
Doorphone 4
(KX-T30865)
Installation
2-21
2.16
Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
Connecting Door Openers
1. While pressing the button below a hole with a driver, insert the wire from the door opener into the hole.
Door opener 1
Door opener 2
Door opener 4
Door opener 3
To the door openers
2. Wrap the strap around all of the cords. (☞ 2.20, Securing the Cords)
!
!
• We recommend using UL1015 wire or the equivalent for wiring.
• The wire should be between 0.4 and 1.2 mm (1/64–3/64 inch) in diameter including the coating.
• Door Opener ports are SELV ports and should only connect to approved SELV devices or connect via a Line Isolation Unit with a Telecommunications Compliance Label.
D = 0.4 – 1.2 mm (1/64 – 3/64 inch)
☞
• Required System Programming
Section 4 System Programming
[700]–[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[703]–[705] Door Opener Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Door Opener, Doorphone Call
2-22
Installation
2.17
Backup Batteries Connection
Two car batteries can be connected to the system as a backup power supply in the event of a power failure.
1. Attach the cables (KX-A227) and 2 user-supplied car batteries (12 VDC each) as shown below. Then insert the connector into the side of the system.
Fuse (250 V / 3.15 A)
Connector
Red
Black
Battery Interface
Two Car batteries (12 VDC each)
!
!
• Make sure of the polarities of batteries and wire.
• Make sure that you do not short the batteries and wires.
Installation
2-23
2.18
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA30877) and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA30874)
3-CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card Installation (KX-TA30877)
To add 3 outside (CO) lines (outside (CO) lines 4 through 6) and 8 extensions (extension jacks 09 through 16), use an optional 3-CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card
(KX-TA30877).
8 SLT Extension Expansion Card Installation (KX-TA30874)
To add 8 extensions (extension jacks 17 through 24), use an optional 8 SLT Extension
Expansion Card (KX-TA30874).
This card can be installed directly to the system or to the KX-TA30877.
!
!
• Only a single line telephone (SLT) can be connected to extension jacks 17 through 24.
Installing the KX-TA30877
1. Loosen the screws and open the top and bottom front covers.
2. Remove the lower front panel with pliers as shown below. Cut the 6 areas marked with a circle.
Lower front panel
2-24
Installation
2.18
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA30877) and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA30874)
3. After cutting the areas, be sure to cut off any excess plastic in order to make the surface smooth.
4. First, insert the plastic spacer into the hole on the KX-TA30877. Attach the 2 extension connectors to the system, install the KX-TA30877 and secure the 2 extension bolts.
Extension Bolts
3-CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card
(KX-TA30877)
Extension Connectors
Spacer
Installation
2-25
2.18
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA30877) and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA30874)
5. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2-conductor wiring) into the modular jacks (CO 4 through 6) on the card. (☞ 2.7, Outside (CO) Line Connection)
6. Connect the line cords to the terminal board or the modular jacks from the Central Office.
7. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2 or 4-conductor wiring) into the modular jacks (JACK 09 through 16). (☞ 2.8, Extension Connection)
8. Wrap the strap around all of the cords. (☞ 2.20, Securing the Cords)
9. Close the covers and secure the screws.
Installing the KX-TA30874
1. Loosen the screws and open the front and bottom front covers.
2. Remove the lower front panel in the same way as installing a KX-TA30877. If you install the KX-TA30874 to a KX-TA30877, remove the top front panel with pliers.
Top front panel
3. After cutting the areas, be sure to cut off any excess plastic in order to make the surface smooth. Please refer to installing the KX-TA30877.
2-26
Installation
2.18
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA30877) and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA30874)
4. Attach the 2 extension connectors to the system first, install the KX-TA30874 and secure the 2 screws.
Screws
8 SLT Extension Expansion Card
(KX-TA30874)
Extension Connectors
5. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2-conductor wiring) into the modular jacks (JACK 17 through 24). (☞ 2.8, Extension Connection)
6. Wrap the strap around all of the cords. (☞ 2.20, Securing the Cords)
7. Close the covers and secure the screws.
Installation
2-27
2.18
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA30877) and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA30874)
Installing the KX-TA30877 and KX-T30874
1. Install the KX-TA30877 first and then the KX-TA30874.
Screws
8 SLT Extension Expansion Card
(KX-TA30874)
Extension Bolts
Extension Connectors
3-CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card
(KX-TA30877)
Extension Connectors
Spacer
2-28
Installation
2.19
Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer
Power failure transfer connects a specific single line telephone (SLT) to selected outside
(CO) lines in the event of system power failure, as follows.
Outside (CO) line 1 – extension (T, R) jack 01
Outside (CO) line 4 – extension (T, R) jack 09
Connection of outside (CO) lines 1 and 4, and the respective extensions require no auxiliary connection.
!
!
• In the event of a power failure, system memory is protected by a factory-provided lithium battery. There is no memory loss except the Camp-on, Saved Number Redial,
Last Number Redial, Call Park and Message Waiting memories.
• The system automatically changes the current connection to the above connection when the power supply stops.
• Proprietary telephones cannot be used during a power failure. Therefore, we recommend connecting SLTs in parallel with proprietary telephones connected to extension jacks 01 and 09.
• If DC power is available from backup batteries when AC power fails, the system will not change the current connection to the above connection. (☞ 2.17, Backup Batteries
Connection)
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Power Failure Transfer, Paralleled Telephone Connection
2.20
Securing the Cords
1. Insert the rivet into the hole in the strap.
2. Insert the rivet and strap into the hole on the system.
Installation
2-29
2.20
Securing the Cords
3. Wrap the strap around all of the cords.
4. To remove the rivet, use a screw driver as shown below.
2.21
Closing the Front Cover
1. Replace the covers and tighten the screws.
2. Tie together all of the connected cords and attach them to the wall so that the cords cannot be pulled out of the system.
2-30
Installation
2.22
Starting the System for the First Time
1. Set the Power Switch to the “OFF” position.
2. Plug the AC power cord into the system and an AC outlet.
3. Turn the Power Switch on.
(The power indicator will light.)
4. Perform the following operation with a proprietary telephone connected to JACK 01.
a) Press the PROGRAM button.
b) Press #.
c) Enter 1234.
d) Enter 999.
e) Press the NEXT (SP-PHONE) button.
f) Press the SELECT (AUTO ANS/MUTE) button until “All Para” is displayed.
g) Press the STORE (AUTO/STORE) button.
h) Press the END (HOLD) button.
i) Press the PROGRAM button.
The system will be initialized with the default values. If the system does not work properly, please see 2.24, “System Data Clear”.
CAUTION • The system will continue to be powered even if the Power Switch is turned
“OFF”.
• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the outlet is located/installed near the equipment and is easily accessible.
To AC Outlet
Installation
2-31
2.23
System Restart
After starting the system, if the system does not operate properly, restart the system.
Before restarting the system, try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.
System Restart causes the following.
• Camp-on is cleared.
• Calls on Hold are terminated.
• Calls on Exclusive Hold are terminated.
• Calls in progress are terminated.
• Call Park is cleared.
• Message Waiting is cleared.
• Last Number Redial is cleared.
• Saved Number Redial is cleared.
Other data is not cleared by System Restart.
1. Turn the Power Switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
!
!
• If the system still does not operate properly, please see 2.24, “System Data Clear”.
2-32
Installation
2.24
System Data Clear
When the system does not operate properly after restarting, you can clear the programming data stored in the system. The system will restart with the default settings.
First, try system program [999] “System Data Clear” by following step 4 in 2.22, “Starting the System for the First Time”. If the system still does not operate properly, please follow the procedure below.
1. Slide the System Clear Switch to the “CLEAR” position.
2. Press the Reset Button.
3. Return the System Clear Switch to the “NORMAL” position before the power indicator stops flashing.
(The power indicator will flash for about 10 seconds.)
Reset Button
System Clear Switch
CAUTION • Before touching the System Clear Switch and Reset Button, put on a grounding strap.
!
!
• After pressing the Reset Button, return the System Clear Switch to the “NORMAL” position in step 3 before the power indicator stops flashing. Otherwise, the system will not clear.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
System Data Default Set
Installation
2-33
2-34
Installation
Section 3
Features
A
3 Features
Absent Message Capability
Allows an extension user to set a message which will be displayed at the calling extension to show the reason for the called extension’s absence. One of 6 messages can be programmed as desired, which are available for any telephone (single line telephone or proprietary telephone). Setting or canceling a message can be done by individual extension users but only callers using a proprietary telephone with a LCD can see the message.
!
!
• The 6 messages are shown below. “%” means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an extension.
(1) Will Return Soon
(2) Gone Home
(3) At Ext %%% (extension number)
(4) Back at %% : %% AM (or PM) (hour : minute)
(5) Out Until %%/%% (month / day)
(6) In a Meeting
• An extension user can only select one message at a time. The selected message is displayed every time the user goes off-hook.
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk, “Showing Your Message on the Calling Party’s Display
(Absent Message Capability)”
Account Code Entry
An account code is used to identify incoming and outgoing outside calls for accounting and billing purposes. The account code is appended to the SMDR call record. For incoming outside calls, an account code is optional. For outgoing outside calls, there are 4 account input modes programmable in program [605], Option, Forced, Verify–All and Verify–Toll.
Option:
Forced:
A 4-digit code may be entered during a conversation or within 30 seconds after a conversation when a record is needed.
A 4-digit code must be entered within 5 seconds after an outside (CO) line is seized. The code can be any number.
Verify–All: Enables to make an outside call if the code entered within 5 seconds after an extension user seizes an outside (CO) line is the same as one of the account codes programmed in [310].
Verify–Toll: Enables to override toll restriction temporarily by entering one of the account codes programmed in [310] within 5 seconds after an outside (CO) line is seized. Calls with COS levels 3 through 5 will be treated as calls with COS level 2. Calls with COS levels 1 and 2 will not be affected.
3-2
Features
3 Features
☞
• Required System Programming
[310] Account Codes
[601]-[603] TRS – Class of Service Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[605] Account Code Entry Mode
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection
• Related Feature References
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR),
Toll Restriction Override by Account Codes
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Calling with Account Codes (Account Code Entry)”
A
Alternate Calling – Ring/Voice (Voice to Ring only)
This system offers a proprietary telephone user 2 types of intercom calling, Voice Call mode and Tone (ring) Call mode. “Voice Call” informs the called party of an incoming call with the calling party’s voice, while “Tone Call” uses a ring tone. A proprietary telephone user can select “Voice Call” or “Tone Call” in the Proprietary Telephone Settings. If the user selects “Voice Call”, the calling party can talk to the user immediately after the confirmation tone. The calling party can switch the pre-set mode at the called extension, from “Voice
Call” to “Tone Call”, by pressing “ ” after dialing the extension number.
!
!
☞
• A rotary telephone user cannot change the pre-set mode at the called extension.
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing Your Telephone Functions”,
Intercom Alert Assignment
1.7 Useful Features, “Alternate Calling – Ring/Voice (Voice to Ring only)”
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
When the selected outside (CO) line or dialed extension is busy, the system will automatically notify an extension user with a callback ringing when the line becomes available. When the user answers the callback ringing:
For an extension: The called extension starts ringing without dialing.
For an outside (CO) line: The line is seized.
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Calls, “Making Your Telephone Ring Back Automatically When a Line
Becomes Free (Automatic Callback Busy – Camp-On)”
Features
3-3
A
3 Features
Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access Number
An Automatic Line Access number (0 or 9) can be programmed. When an extension user dials an Automatic Line Access number before a telephone number, an available outside
(CO) line from the assigned lines in program [419] is seized automatically. If “0” is selected in program [121], the operator call will be “9” automatically. If “9” is selected in program
[121], the operator call will be “0” automatically.
☞
• Related Feature References
Operator Call, Outside Calling
• Required System Programming
[121] Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access Number Selection
[419] Automatic Designated Outside (CO) Line Access
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
The system automatically selects the least expensive route available at the time a long distance call is made on the outside (CO) line which has enabled the ARS feature. It is not necessary to dial the access code of the least expensive carrier.
3-4
!
!
• System Programming is required to execute this feature.
• The dialed number is modified for sending out to the least expensive carrier. The following are modification examples.
Example 1 (Domestic call using the Route 1):
[350] “ARS Selection”: Enable
[351] “Route 1 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)”: 93
[360] “ARS Modification – Removed Digits”: 0 (No deletion)
[361] “ARS Modification – Added Number”: 050
<Dialed number>
93 425 9477
<Modified number>
050 93 425 9477
Example 2 (International call using the Route 2):
[350] “ARS Selection”: Enable
[352] “Route 2 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)”: 07
[360] “ARS Modification – Removed Digits”: 2
[361] “ARS Modification – Added Number”: 05000
<Dialed number>
07 81 92 477 1450
<Modified number>
050 00 81 92 477 1450
☞
• Required System Programming
[350] “ARS Selection”
[351]-[354] “Route 1 through 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)”
[355]-[358] “Route 1 through 4 Exception Codes”
[359] “1st Carrier Selection Code”
[360] “ARS Modification – Removed Digits”
[361] “ARS Modification – Added Number”
[362] “ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection”
[363] “ARS Interdigit Time”
Features
3 Features
Flow chart of possible cases and results for ARS calls
Start
A
*1
Is (another) 1 digit dialed within the ARS Interdigit Time?
No
Yes
Each time a digit is dialed, the system checks the dialed number (other than Host PBX access codes,
Carrier excepted codes and 1st carrier access code).
*2
Is the dialed number a toll restriction denied code ?
No
Yes
Reorder tone
*3
Is the dialed number an emergency call number?
No
Is the dialed number a toll restriction denied code ?
*4
No
Yes
Yes
The dialed number is sent to the Central Office.
Reorder tone
Does the dialed number include the 1st carrier access code?
No
Does the area code match a
*5
Route 1 selection code?
Yes
No
Yes
The dialed number (other than the 1st carrier access code) is sent to the Central Office.
*6
Does the area code match a Route 1 exception code?
Yes
No
Removing from and adding to the dialed number.
*7
Does the area code match a
Route 2 selection code?
No
Does the area code match a
Route 3 selection code?
No
Does the area code match a
*12
Yes
Route 4 selection code?
No
*8
Yes
*10
Yes
*9
Does the area code match a Route 2 exception code?
Yes
No
*11
Does the area code match a Route 3 exception code?
Yes
No
*13
Does the area code match a Route 4 exception code?
Yes
No
Removing from
*7 and adding to the dialed number.
Removing from and adding to the dialed number.
Removing from and adding to the dialed number.
*7
*7
Route 1 is selected.
Route 2 is selected.
Route 3 is selected.
Route 4 is selected.
Are 7 digits (other than Host PBX access codes, Carrier excepted codes and 1st carrier access code) dialed?
No
Yes
The dialed number is sent to the Central Office.
Goes to A
*14
Note: The explanation for *1 through *14 is on the next page.
A
Features
3-5
A-B
3 Features
*1: The ARS Interdigit timer is assigned in program [363] “ARS Interdigit Time”.
*2: The codes are assigned in the following programs.
Host PBX access codes: [403] “Host PBX Access Codes”
Carrier excepted codes: [300] “Carrier Excepted Code Assignment”
1st carrier access code: [359] “1st Carrier Selection Code”.
*3: Emergency call numbers are assigned in program [309] “Emergency Dial Number Set”.
*4: Toll restriction denied codes are assigned in program [302]-[305] “Toll Restriction – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes”.
*5: Route 1 selection codes are assigned in program [351] “Route 1 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)”.
*6: Route 1 exception codes are assigned in program [355] “Route 1 Exception Codes”.
*7: Removing digits are assigned in program [360] “ARS Modification – Removed Digits” and added numbers are in [361] “ARS Modification – Added Number”
*8: Route 2 selection codes are assigned in program [352] “Route 2 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)”.
*9: Route 2 exception codes are assigned in program [356] “Route 2 Exception Codes”.
*10: Route 3 selection codes are assigned in program [353] “Route 3 Selection Codes (Leading
Digits)”.
*11: Route 3 exception codes are assigned in program [357] “Route 3 Exception Codes”.
*12: Route 4 selection codes are assigned in program [354] “Route 4 Selection Codes (Leading
Digits)”.
*13: Route 4 exception codes are assigned in program [358] “Route 4 Exception Codes”.
*14: The system repeats checking until 7 digits are dialed.
Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
When an extension user calls a busy extension, the busy extension will hear a Call Waiting tone to know that a call is waiting.
!
!
☞
• This feature is only available if the called extension has set the Call Waiting feature. If the Call Waiting feature is activated, the caller will hear a ringback tone. If not, the caller will hear a reorder tone.
She is on the line.
I will send a Call
Waiting tone.
• Related Feature Reference
Call Waiting
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Calls, “Sending a Call
Waiting Tone to a Busy Extension
(Busy Station Signaling — BSS)”
I’ve got another call.
Please hold.
CALL WAITING TONE
3-6
Features
3 Features
C
Call Forwarding
Allows an extension user to transfer incoming calls automatically to another extension or to an external destination. The following types are available.
All Calls:
Busy or No Answer:
All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension.
All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension when the extension user does not answer within the programmed time in [202] or when the extension is busy.
To an Outside(CO) Line: Allows an extension user enabled in program [607] to forward all incoming calls to an external party.
Follow Me: Allows an extension user to set the Call Forwarding – All
Calls feature from another extension.
!
!
• Extensions which have already been assigned as a forwarded destination cannot set the Call
Forwarding feature.
• If the Do Not Disturb (DND) feature has already been set, setting the Call Forwarding feature will cancel DND.
• The Call Forwarding – to Outside (CO) Line feature will forward all incoming intercom calls and certain kinds of incoming outside calls. These outside calls must arrive on outside (CO) lines whose programming, [414]-[416] “Outside (CO) Line Mode —
Day/Night/Lunch”, is one of the following:
1) DIL
2) DISA1 or DISA2 (only when the call is directly sent to an extension, not intercepted)
3) UCD (only when the UCD group has one member)
• If a call between 2 outside parties is established by the Call Forwarding – to Outside
(CO) Line feature, the duration of the call is determined by the system timer assigned in program [205]. An alarm tone is generated to both outside parties 15 seconds before the timeout. The call will be disconnected at the timeout.
☞
• Required System Programming
[202] Call Forwarding Start Time
[205] Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Duration Time Limit
[607] Call Forwarding to an Outside (CO) Line
• Related Feature Reference
Limited Call Duration
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
FWD/DND (Forward/Do Not Disturb) Button
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk, “Forwarding a Call (Call Forwarding)”
Features
3-7
C
3 Features
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
The Calling Party Control (CPC) signal is a disconnect signal sent from the Central Office for an outside call. The CPC signal detection is activated by programs [420] and [421].
Program [420] is for incoming outside calls, and [421] is for outgoing outside calls.
☞
• Required System Programming
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls
Call Park
Allows an extension user to place a held call into a system parking area. Any extension user can retrieve the parked call to perform other operations. Up to 10 calls can be parked at the same time.
!
!
• If a parked call is not retrieved within the assigned time in program [200], a ring tone or an alarm tone will be heard.
• If a parked call is not retrieved within 30 minutes, it will be automatically disconnected.
• This feature is useful when an extension user wants to hold more than one intercom call with a proprietary telephone, or more than one intercom call or outside call with a single line telephone.
• During a 5-party conference, this feature cannot be performed.
☞
• Required System Programming
[200] Hold Recall Time
• Related Feature Reference
Conference (5-party)
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.5 During Conversation, “Placing a Call in System Parking Area
(Call Park)”
Parking zone
3-8
Features
3 Features
C
Call Pickup
<Directed Call Pickup>
Allows an extension user to answer a call ringing at any other extension.
<Group Call Pickup>
Allows an extension user to answer a call ringing at another extension, if the call is ringing within the user’s extension group assigned in program [600]. If “Enable” is selected for an extension group in [127], persons in the group can pickup calls just by going off-hook, even though their extension is not ringing.
<Call Pickup Deny>
Allows an extension user to prevent other extensions from picking up a call ringing at the user’s extension with the Call Pickup feature.
<Call Retrieving from a TAM (Telephone Answering Machine)>
Allows an extension user to answer an incoming call received by a TAM extension assigned in program [611].
!
!
☞
• The user can pick up an incoming outside, intercom or doorphone call with the Directed
Call Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature.
• A confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up with the Directed Call
Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature. The tone can be disabled in program [117].
• If a ringing extension sets the Call Pickup Deny feature, an extension user will hear a reorder tone when the user tries to pick up the call.
He’s not in.
I’ll answer it.
• Required System Programming
[117] Call Pickup Tone
[127] Pickup Group Set
[600] Extension Group Assignment
[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine)
Extension
Hello.
Sorry, Mr. Smith is out of the office.
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.4 Receiving Calls, “Picking up a Call Ringing at Another Extension (Call Pickup)”
Call Splitting
Allows an extension user to talk to 2 different parties. If a call is received while the user is already on the line, the user can place the current call on hold and have a conversation with the other party.
!
!
☞
• This feature is not possible for a doorphone call, page or 5-party conference.
• Related Feature References
Conference (5-party), Doorphone Call, Paging
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.5 During Conversation, “Call Splitting”
3-9
Features
C
3 Features
Call Transfer – to Extension
Allows an extension user to transfer a received call, an intercom or an outside call, to another extension. Two types are available.
Screened Call Transfer: Announces the call to another extension before completing the transfer.
Unscreened Call Transfer:Immediately releases the call to another extension without an announcement.
!
!
• If the destination extension does not answer the call within the assigned time in program
[201], the call will return to the transferring party.
• An outside call can be transferred to an extension by simply pressing a DSS button. It requires program [005].
• If Music on Hold is enabled, music is sent to the original external caller while being transferred. Sending a cyclic tone or music on hold can be programmed by program
[111].
• During a 5-party conference, the user cannot transfer a call.
☞
• Required System Programming
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button
[111] Hold Music Selection
[201] Transfer Recall Time
• Related Feature References
Conference (5-party), Hold, Music on Hold
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.5 During Conversation, “Transferring a Call to an Extension (Call Transfer – to
Extension)”
Call Transfer – to Outside (CO) Line
!
!
Allows an extension user enabled in program [606] to transfer a received call, an intercom call or an outside call, to an external party.
• If a call between 2 external parties is established using this feature, an alarm tone will be sent to both parties 15 seconds before the assigned time limit in program [205]. Also, a ring tone or an alarm tone will be sent to the extension who transferred the call
50 seconds before the timeout. The call will be disconnected at the timeout unless the extension joins the conversation again.
• A single line telephone user cannot transfer a received call to an external party.
• If Music on Hold is enabled, music will be sent to the original external caller while being transferred. Sending a cyclic tone or music on hold can be programmed by program [111].
3-10
Features
3 Features
C
☞
• To join the conversation again after transferring the call, press the corresponding CO button. A conference call will be established. This feature is not available for a single line telephone.
• Required System Programming
[111] Hold Music Selection
[205] Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Duration Time Limit
[606] Call Transfer to an Outside (CO) Line
• Related Feature Reference
Hold, Music on Hold
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.5 During Conversation, “Transferring a Call to an Outside (CO) Line (Call Transfer – to Outside (CO) Line)”
Call Waiting
!
!
During a conversation, a Call Waiting tone informs an extension user that there is a call waiting. The user can answer the second call by disconnecting the first call or placing it on hold. When Call Waiting is enabled, a Call Waiting tone is sent to the user under the following conditions.
1) When an outside call (except a doorphone call) is received, or
2) When another extension executes the Busy
Station Signaling (BSS) feature.
I’ve got another call.
Please hold.
CALL WAITING TONE
• For proprietary telephone users, a Call Waiting tone (Tone 1 or Tone 2) can be selected in the Proprietary Telephone Settings. Tone 2 depends on System Programming. Program [423] is for outside calls and program [115] is for intercom calls.
15 s
Tone 1
Tone 2
Single:
5 s
Double:
Triple:
☞
• Required System Programming
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection
[423] Outside (CO) Line Ringing Pattern Selection
• Related Feature Reference
Hold
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings,
“Customizing Your Telephone Functions”, Call Waiting Tone Selection
1.5 During Conversation, “Call Waiting”
Features
3-11
C
3 Features
Conference (3-party)
During a 2-party conversation, an extension user can add a third party to make a 3-party conference. The maximum number of members of a conference can be programmed in program [116].
!
!
• The possible combinations, through System Programming, are 3 extensions, 1 extension and 2 external parties, or 2 extensions and 1 external party.
• When a 2-party call is changed to a 3-party call or vice versa, a confirmation tone is sent to all 3 parties.
• A 3-party call can also be established by the Executive Busy Override feature.
☞
• Required System Programming
[116] Conference Pattern Selection
• Related Feature References
Executive Busy Override
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
CONFERENCE Button
1.7 Useful Features, “Conference (3-party)”
3-12
Features
3 Features
C-D
Conference (5-party)
Allows an extension user to establish a 5-party conference when “5 party C-2 E-5” is selected in program [116].
!
!
• Up to 2 external parties can participate in a conference call.
• All 5 parties can be extensions.
• Only one 5-party conference can be established at one time.
• When a 5-party conference is established, a confirmation tone is sent to all parties.
• The Executive Busy Override feature and the Call Park feature by another extension are not available during a 5-party conference.
☞
• Required System Programming
[116] Conference Pattern Selection
• Related Feature References
Conference (3-party), Call Park, Executive Busy Override
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
CONFERENCE Button
1.7 Useful Features, “Conference (5-party)”
Data Line Security
Prevents an extension user from being interrupted by the Call Waiting and Executive Busy
Override features. This feature also prevents a ring tone or an alarm tone from being sent when a call is kept waiting longer than a pre-determined time. Data communication devices, such as computers and facsimiles, connected to an extension jack can operate without interruptions.
☞
• Related Feature References
Call Waiting, Executive Busy Override
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Data Line Security”
Features
3-13
D
3
Date and Time Setting
A manager or operator can adjust the current time.
☞
• Required System Programming
[000] Date and Time Setting
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Date and Time Setting”
Features
Direct In Line (DIL)
Enables an incoming outside call to go directly to a specified extension. This outside (CO) line can be used by multiple extension users to make a call, but can only be used by one extension to receive a call. DIL can have a different destination in the day, night and/or lunch modes.
!
!
☞
• If the destination extension is in an extension group which has enabled the Station
Hunting feature in program [100] “Hunting Group Set”, Station Hunting (Terminate or
Circular in program [101] “Hunting Type”) works when the extension is busy.
• Required System Programming
[414]–[416] Outside (CO) Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch
• Related Feature References
Station Hunting, Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service
1
4
7 8
0
2
5
3
6
9
1
4
7 8
0
2
5
3
6
9
1
4
7 8
0
2
5
3
6
9
1
4
7 8
0
2
5
3
6
9
3-14
Features
3 Features
D
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
!
!
Allows an outside caller to access specific system features as if the caller is an extension in the system. The caller can have direct access to features such as:
• Placing an incoming call to an extension, extension group or operator. The caller also has the option of dialing the route for an extension using a 1 digit number (DISA builtin auto attendant number) via DISA calls.
• Calling an external party.
One of the following must be selected in program [511] to have direct access to these features:
(1) None Security, (2) Trunk (Outside (CO) Line) Security, or (3) All Security.
None Security: Any caller can make outside or intercom calls.
Trunk Security: A pre-assigned DISA security code must be entered to make outside calls.
All Security: A pre-assigned DISA security code must be entered to make both outside and intercom calls.
This prevents the caller from making unauthorized calls. However, when making an outside call by Call Forwarding – to Outside (CO) Line, the call is allowed (exception).
The DISA feature operates without an optional card installed. If an outgoing message
(OGM) which greets a caller and gives information, or fax detection is required, an optional
OGM/FAX Detection Card must be installed. The system can detect a FAX (CNG) tone according to program [514]. An OGM can be programmed in program [502] (
☞ “Outgoing
Message (OGM)” in this section). When a caller reaches a DISA line, a message will greet the caller. Two different DISA messages can be recorded by the operator or manager. For example, one message can be used in day mode and the other in night mode, or they can be used for different outside (CO) lines. If an optional OGM/FAX Detection Card is not installed, the caller will hear a short beep instead of the OGM (Internal DISA).
• “DISA1” or “DISA2” must be assigned to outside (CO) line(s) as the outside (CO) line mode in programs [414] through [416].
• After the DISA Delayed Answer Time assigned in program [504] expires and a ringback tone is returned to the caller, a DISA call will be answered. The caller can dial during the message or after the tone.
• This system can store up to 10 programmable DISA built-in auto attendant numbers in program [501]. Each number is 1 digit.
• The DISA built-in auto attendant number may be the same as the first digit of other numbers (extension number, etc.). To avoid confusion, the system waits for the second digit for a preprogrammed amount of time in program [517] (default: 2 seconds). If the timer expires, the system will assume that the first digit is a DISA built-in auto attendant number.
• Only one OGM/FAX Detection Card can be installed .
• The DISA line can be used to make outside calls, if a security code assigned in program
[512] (if required) has been dialed.
• This system can store up to 4 programmable DISA security codes. Each code should be different.
• When a wrong DISA security code is entered, 3 beeps will be heard. The call will be disconnected after 3 failed attempts. If you enter a security code a second and third time, dialing is not necessary.
Features
3-15
D
3 Features
• The duration of outside-to-outside (CO-to-CO) line calls can be limited in program [205].
When the specified time expires, both lines are disconnected. A warning tone is sent to both parties 15 seconds before the time-limit.
• To detect the end of an outside-to-outside (CO-to-CO) line call, CPC Signal Detection can be assigned. Programs [420] and [421] are required.
☞
• Connection Reference
2.15 OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation
• Required System Programming
To enable the DISA feature
[414]–[416] Outside (CO) Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls
[500] DISA Incoming Dialing Mode Selection
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant
[502] OGM Mode Selection
[503] FAX Connection
[506] DISA Busy Mode
[510] DISA No Dial Mode
[511] DISA Security Type
[512] DISA Security Codes
[513] Cyclic Tone Detection
[514] FAX Tone Detection
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment
[518] DISA Tone Selection after the Security Code
To set DISA timer values
[205] Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Duration Time Limit
[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time
[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM
[517] DISA AA Wait Time
[519] DISA OGM Mute Time
To enable the Intercept Routing feature
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[507] DISA Intercept Mode
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA
• Related Feature References
Intercept Routing, Outgoing Message (OGM), Polarity Reverse Detection,
Station Hunting
3-16
Features
3 Features
DISA Operation
Calling an extension by following the outgoing message
from an External Party
In None Security Mode
DISA phone no.
extension no.
Enter the DISA phone number.
Ringback tone and
DISA outgoing message
Enter the extension number.
Ring back tone
• You can dial the AA number* instead.
In All Security Mode
DISA phone no.
DISA security code extension no.
Enter the DISA phone number.
Ringback tone and
DISA outgoing message
Dial .
Enter the pre-assigned
DISA security code.
(4 digits)
One short beep
Enter the extension number.
Ring back tone
• You can dial the AA number* instead.
D
Calling an extension without an outgoing message (Internal DISA)
from an External Party
In None Security Mode
DISA phone no.
Enter the DISA phone number.
extension no.
Ringback tone and one short beep
Enter the extension number.
Ring back tone
• You can dial the AA number* instead.
In All Security Mode
DISA phone no.
DISA security code extension no.
Enter the DISA phone number.
Ringback tone and one short beep
Dial .
Enter the pre-assigned
DISA security code.
(4 digits)
One short beep
Enter the extension number.
Ring back tone
• You can dial the AA number* instead.
AA number*: A DISA built-in auto attendant number assigned in program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto
Attendant”.
Features
3-17
D
Calling an external party by following the outgoing message
from an External Party
In None Security Mode
3 Features
DISA phone no.
line acccess code phone no.
Enter the DISA phone number.
Ringback tone and
DISA outgoing message
In Trunk Security Mode
Enter a line access code
(9 or 0, or 81 through 86).
Dial tone from the
Central Office
Enter the phone number of the external party.
DISA phone no.
Enter the DISA phone number.
DISA security code line acccess code phone no.
Ringback tone and
DISA outgoing message
Dial .
Enter the pre-assigned DISA security code.
(4 digits)
One short beep
Enter a line access code
(9 or 0, or 81 through 86).
Dial tone from the
Central Office
Enter the phone number of the external party.
In All Security Mode
DISA phone no.
DISA security code line acccess code phone no.
Enter the DISA phone number.
Ringback tone and
DISA outgoing message
Dial .
Enter the pre-assigned DISA security code.
(4 digits)
One short beep
Enter a line access code
(9 or 0, or 81 through 86).
Dial tone from the
Central Office
Enter the phone number of the external party.
Calling an external party without an outgoing message (Internal DISA)
from an External Party
In None Security Mode
DISA phone no.
Enter the DISA phone number.
Ringback tone and one beep
In Trunk Security Mode
line acccess code phone no.
Enter a line access code
(9 or 0, or 81 through 86).
Dial tone from the
Central Office
Enter the phone number of the external party.
DISA phone no.
DISA security code line acccess code phone no.
Enter the DISA phone number.
Ringback tone and one short beep
Dial .
Enter the pre-assigned DISA security code.
(4 digits)
One short beep
Enter a line access code
(9 or 0, or 81 through 86).
Dial tone from the
Central Office
Enter the phone number of the external party.
In All Security Mode
DISA phone no.
DISA security code line acccess code phone no.
Enter the DISA phone number.
Ringback tone and one short beep
Dial .
Enter the pre-assigned DISA security code.
(4 digits)
One short beep
Enter a line access code
(9 or 0, or 81 through 86).
Dial tone from the
Central Office
Enter the phone number of the external party.
3-18
Features
3 Features
D
Flow chart of possible cases and results for DISA calls
An outside line call is made.
*1
The caller reaches the DISA line.
Without optional
OGM/FAX Detection Card
(Internal DISA)
@@@@@@@@e?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e
@@@@@@@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@@@@@@@
@@@@@@@@
One short beep
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
?@@
?@@
?@@
?@@
?@@@@@@@@
?@@@@@@@@
*2
With optional
OGM/FAX Detection Card
@@@@@@@@e?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@@@@@@@
@@@@@@@@
OGM
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@
?@@
?@@
?@@
?@@
?@@@@@@@@
?@@@@@@@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
*13
C
*3
*14
*18
A number is dialed.
*4
Is Intercept Routing employed?
*8
Cyclic tone,
CPC signal
*15
Nothing is dialed.
The call is sent to the fax extension.
Is a security code required?
No
*5
Yes
The security code is entered.
All
What is the security type?
Trunk or None
Is Intercept Routing employed?
*16
Yes
Disconnect
Busy tone
No
One short beep
The code is correct.
*6
Make an outside call.
The call is sent to another extension.
The code is incorrect.
*17
Disconnect.
A
Reorder tone
The call reaches the destination.
*7
Disconnect.
Answered.
The call is not answered.
The destination extension(s) is(are) busy.
*9
Answered.
The call is not answered.
Answered.
The call is not answered for
40 seconds.
B
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
What is the DISA
Busy Mode?
*10
Yes
FAX ( CNG) tone
No
The call is sent to another extension.
Disconnect
Busy tone
Call Waiting DISA2
Goes to
A
Disconnect.
*11
The other
OGM is heard.
Answered.
Goes to
The call is not answered.
C
*12
Goes to B
Note: The explanation for *1 through *18 is on the next page.
Features
3-19
D
3 Features
*1: The DISA Delayed timer starts. This is the time between a call reaching the system and being received. The time is assigned in program [504].
*2: When the assigned time period in program [519] expires, the system sends a short beep to the caller.
*3: The Intercept Timer for Internal DISA starts. This is the time the system waits for the number sent by the caller. If nothing is entered by the caller during this time, the system will regard it as “Nothing is dialed.” The time is assigned in program [515].
*4: The system can accept the following numbers:
• 100 through 199 as an extension number.
• 81 through 86 as an outside (CO) line group line access number.
• 9 as an automatic line access number when “Without AA” is assigned in program [500].
Even if “With AA” is assigned, 9 is regarded as the automatic line access number if nothing is assigned to “9” in program [501]. In case “9” is assigned as the operator call number in program [121] “Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access Number Selection”, 9 is regarded as the operator call number instead of an automatic line access number.
• 0 as the operator call number when the operator is assigned in program
[008] “Operator Assignment” and “Without AA” is assigned in program [500]. Even if
“With AA” is assigned, 0 is regarded as the operator call number if nothing is assigned to
“0” in program [501]. If “0” is assigned as an automatic line access number in program
[121], 0 is regarded as an automatic line access number instead of the operator call number.
• 0 through 9 as a built-in auto attendant number when “With AA” is assigned in program
[500]. The DISA AA Wait timer starts after receiving the first 1-digit number. If the timer expires, the system will assume that the first digit is an AA number. The time is assigned in program [517].
*5: A security code is necessary when program [511] is assigned as follows.
• All Security – the system waits for a security code dialed after “ ”. When the security code matches a code programmed in [512], the system accepts the numbers after the code.
• Trunk Security – the caller can access an outside (CO) line if the security code matches a code programmed in [512]. The caller can access other destinations without the security code.
If the entered number is the same as one of the security codes, a short beep will be heard.
The short beep can be disabled by program [518]. If the number is wrong,
3 beeps will be heard. The call will be disconnected after 3 failed attempts.
*6: The caller must enter the desired telephone number after hearing a dial tone from the Central
Office.
*7: The DISA Ring Timer Before Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in [508].
*8: The system treats the call according to program [507] as follows.
• Disconnect – the call is disconnected.
• Intercept – the call is sent to the extensions programmed in [408]-[410] “Flexible
Ringing Assignment – Day/Night/Lunch”.
If the call is still not answered within the time programmed in [509], it will be disconnected.
3-20
Features
3 Features
D
*9: If the destination extension belongs to a hunting group and all extensions in the group are busy, the system will check the DISA Busy Mode. If the destination is a DISA ring group, the DISA
Busy Mode will not work for the call. The system regards the call as unanswered.
*10: The DISA Busy Mode is selected in program [506]. There are 3 modes as follows.
• Disconnect – the caller hears a busy tone and a call is disconnected.
• Call Waiting – the destination extension hears a call waiting tone if they have enabled Call
Waiting.
• DISA2 – if “MODE2” is assigned in program [502] and a message is recorded in
OGM2, the caller will hear the message and the system waits for the new destination.
*11: The DISA Ring Timer Before Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in [508].
*12: In this case, the system disregards the security type and does not accept a line access code. If nothing is recorded in OGM2 or OGM2 is used for another caller, the caller will hear a busy tone and the call is disconnected.
*13: The OGM is sent to the caller according to programs [414]–[416] and [502] when the assigned time in program [519] expires. If an OGM is not recorded, the DISA Wait Timer
After OGM programmed in [505] starts immediately.
When the system detects a FAX (CNG) tone while the OGM is being sent, the call is sent to the FAX extension assigned in program [503]. When the system detects a cyclic tone or CPC signal while the OGM is being sent, the call is disconnected.
*14: The DISA Wait Timer After OGM starts. The system waits for a number from the caller during the time assigned in program [505]. When the system detects a FAX (CNG) tone during the programmed time, the call is sent to the FAX extension. When the system detects a cyclic tone or CPC signal during the programmed time, the call is disconnected.
*15: After the DISA Wait Timer After OGM or the Intercept Timer for Internal DISA expires, the system regards that nothing was dialed.
*16: The system treats the call according to program [510] as follows.
• Disconnect – the call is disconnected.
• Intercept – the call is sent to the extensions programmed in [408]-[410]. If all extensions are assigned to “Disable”, the call will be disconnected.
*17: The DISA Ring Timer After Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in [509]. If the call is not answered during the programmed time, the call will be disconnected.
*18: The FAX extension assigned in program [503] receives the call. When the extension is busy, the system sends a busy tone to the sending FAX. If the call is not answered after 40 seconds, the call will be disconnected.
Program [514] sets how many times the FAX (CNG) tone must be detected before the system recognizes the incoming signal as facsimile data.
Features
3-21
D
3 Features
Display Contrast Adjustment (KX-T7330 only)
Allows a display proprietary telephone user to adjust the display contrast with the
CONTRAST selector.
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Display Contrast Adjustment”
Distinctive Dial Tones
An extension user will hear 3 types of dial tone patterns which give information about the features activated on the telephone.
Dial Tone 1: This is a normal dial tone. None of the features listed in Dial Tone 2 are activated.
1 s
Dial Tone 2: Sent when any of the following features are set.
• Absent Message Capability • Background Music (BGM)
• Call Forwarding
• Data Line Security
• Electronic Station Lockout
(for proprietary telephones only)
• Call Pickup Deny
• Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Message Waiting
(for proprietary telephones only)
• Remote Station Lock Control • Pickup Dialing
(for single line telephones only)
• Timed Reminder
1 s
Dial Tone 3: Sent when making an Account Code Entry and answering a Timed
Reminder call. Also sent when going off-hook with a single line telephone which has a message in a Voice Processing System.
1 s
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Distinctive Dial Tones”
3-22
Features
3 Features
D
Do Not Disturb (DND)
<Do Not Disturb (DND)>
Allows an extension user to prevent other parties from disturbing them. The extension will not receive intercom or outside calls.
<Do Not Disturb (DND) Override>
Allows an extension user enabled in program [609] to call an extension which has set the Do
Not Disturb (DND) feature.
!
!
• If your proprietary telephone (PT) is not supplied with the FWD/DND button, it can be assigned to a flexible CO button in the Proprietary Telephone Settings.
• DND does not work for the following calls: Hold recall or Timed Reminder.
• A PT user in the DND mode can answer a call by pressing the corresponding flashing button.
• If the Call Forwarding feature has already been set, setting the DND feature will cancel
Call Forwarding.
☞
• Required System Programming
[609] Do Not Disturb Override
• Related Feature References
Call Forwarding,
Timed Reminder
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings,
“Customizing the Buttons on
Your Telephone”,
FWD/DND (Forward/Do Not Disturb) Button
1.7 Useful Features, “Rejecting Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb — DND)”
1.7 Useful Features, “Calling an Extension which Denies Receiving Calls
(Do Not Disturb Override)”
DND TONE
Door Opener
Up to 4 Door Openers can be connected to the system. The door can be unlocked by a preassigned extension users in programs [703]-[705].
Could you please open the door?
Panasonic
Just a moment please.
!
!
• An optional Doorphone/Door Opener Card must be installed to the system and a usersupplied door opener to the door to be opened. Four openers can be installed.
• The door opener will open the door even if a doorphone is not installed.
• The door opener timer can be modified in program [709].
Features
3-23
D
☞
• Connection Reference
2.16 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
• Required System Programming
[703]–[705] Door Opener Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[709] Door Opener Time
• Related Feature Reference
Doorphone Call
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Door Opener”
3 Features
Doorphone Call
Up to 4 Doorphones (KX-T30865) can be installed. If a visitor presses the doorphone button, a pre-assigned extension user in programs [700]-[702] can answer the call and talk to the visitor. Any extension user can call a doorphone. The doorphones are also used for the
Room Monitor feature.
!
!
• An optional Doorphone/Door Opener Card must be installed to the system and a doorphone. Four doorphones can be installed.
• Doorphone 1 and 2 cannot be used simultaneously. When one is in use, an extension user cannot have a conversation with the other. Doorphone 3 and 4 are the same.
• An access tone can be programmed in [707] to be sent to a monitored doorphone before room monitoring starts.
• The ring tone from the doorphone call is programmable in [706].
☞
• Connection Reference
2.16 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
• Required System Programming
[700]–[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[706] Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection
[708] Doorphone Ringing Time
• Related Feature References
Door Opener, Room Monitor
• Operating Instructions References
1.7 Useful Features, “Room Monitor”
1.7 Useful Features, “Doorphone Call”
3-24
Features
3 Features
D-E
DSS Console
The Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console provides direct access to extensions, a busy lamp display, as well as 16 PF (Programmable Feature) buttons.
The DSS Console must be programmed to work with a proprietary telephone (PT). The jack number of the DSS Console and its associated PT are assigned in programs [003] and [004].
Up to 2 consoles can be installed per system.
If a feature like One-Touch Dialing is assigned to a DSS button or PF button, accessing the feature can be done easily by pressing the corresponding button. This is very useful for an operator or manager. Refer to the Operating Instructions for more details.
!
!
• Programming the DSS and PF buttons can be done only from the paired telephone.
• Indicating the Forward (FWD) or Do Not Disturb (DND) status of corresponding extensions using a DSS button indication is programmable in [112].
☞
• Connection Reference
2.8 Extension Connection
• Required System Programming
[003] DSS Console Port Assignment
[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console
[112] DSS Console Indication Mode
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.9 DSS Console Features
Emergency Call
Allows an extension user to access a pre-assigned emergency number which can be dialed regardless of any restrictions.
!
!
• Up to 5 emergency numbers can be stored.
• An emergency call is allowed even in the following cases;
— in Account Code Modes (Verify–All, Verify–Toll and Forced modes),
— in any toll restriction COS number, and
— in Electronic Station Lockout.
☞
• Required System Programming
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set
• Related Feature References
Account Code Entry, Toll Restriction, Station Lock
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Calls, “Making Emergency Calls (Emergency Call)”
Features
3-25
E
3 Features
Executive Busy Override
<Executive Busy Override – Extension>
Allows an extension user enabled in program [608] to interrupt an existing intercom call. A
3-party conference will be established.
<Executive Busy Override – Outside (CO) Line>
Allows a proprietary telephone user enabled in program [608] to interrupt an existing outside call or add a third party. A 3-party conference will be established.
<Executive Busy Override Deny>
Allows an extension user to prevent other extension users from interrupting their conversation.
!
!
• The Executive Busy Override feature will not work if the extension engaged the conversation has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security.
• When a 3-party call is changed to a 2-party call or vice versa, a confirmation tone will be sent to all parties.
☞
• Required System Programming
[608] Executive Busy Override
• Related Feature Reference
Conference (3-party)
• Operating Instructions References
1.3 Making Calls, “Interrupting an Existing Call (Executive Busy Override)”
1.3 Making Calls, “Denying ‘Interrupting an Existing Call’
(Executive Busy Override Deny)”
Extension Button Confirmation (KX-T7330 only)
Allows a display proprietary telephone user to confirm the values stored in the buttons, such as the REDIAL button or flexible CO button, by pressing the corresponding button while on-hook.
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features “Extension Button Confirmation (KX-T7330 only)”
3-26
Features
3 Features
E
Extension Group
☞
The system supports 8 extension groups. In an extension group, the following features can be activated.
• Group Call Pickup: Any member of an extension group can pick up a call directed to another member in the same group.
• Paging – Group: Any member of an extension group can make a voice announcement to another group member.
A hunting group, DISA ring group or UCD group is a specific extension group. The following operation as well as the features above can be activated for a hunting group, DISA ring group or UCD group.
Hunting Group
An extension group enabled in program [100] “Hunting Group Set” will perform the
Station Hunting feature. See “Station Hunting” in this section.
DISA Ring Group
All extensions in a DISA ring group assigned as an auto attendant destination in program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto Attendant” will ring simultaneously. Selecting
“DISA1” or “DISA2” in programs [414]–[416] “Outside (CO) Line Mode —
Day/Night/Lunch” is required. Also, you must select “With AA” in program [500]
“DISA Incoming Dialing Mode Selection”.
UCD Group
One extension group assigned as the UCD group in program [520] “UCD Group” can be the destination of incoming outside calls via the UCD feature. Selecting “UCD” in programs [414]–[416] “Outside (CO) Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch” is required.
• Required System Program Address
[600] Extension Group Assignment
• Related Feature References
Call Pickup, Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Paging, Station Hunting,
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Extension Password / System Password
The extension password assigned by the manager (extension jack 01) to each extension can be used for the Walking COS feature. The system password is used for entering System
Programming and also before assigning the extension password.
☞
• Required System Programming
[002] System Password
• Related Feature References
Walking COS
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Extension Password Set (Manager only)”
Features
3-27
E-F
3 Features
External Feature Access
Allows an extension user to access special features (e.g. Call Waiting) offered by the Central
Office or host PBX. This is done by placing the current call on hold and sending a flash signal using either the FLASH/RECALL button or the feature number. This feature is effective only during an outside call.
!
!
• When “MODE2” is selected in program [110] and the FLASH/RECALL button is pressed for longer than the time programmed in [418], this feature will not work.
• The flash time must be assigned in program [418] as required by the host PBX or outside
(CO) line.
☞
• Required System Programming
[110] Flash Key Mode
[418] Flash Time
• Related Feature References
Flash/Recall, Host PBX Access
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “External Feature Access”
Flash/Recall
The FLASH button or RECALL button is used to allow a proprietary telephone user to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up. This is activated when “MODE2” is selected in program [110] and the FLASH/RECALL button is pressed for longer than the time programmed in [418]. When “MODE1” is selected in program
[110], the FLASH/RECALL button can be used to access features of the Central Office or host PBX (External Feature Access). It is performed by putting the current party on hold and sending a flash signal while having an outside call.
!
!
• Assigning the External Feature Access feature to any flexible button is useful when
“MODE 2” was selected in program [110]. This can be done from any extension by assigning the FLASH/RECALL button to a One-Touch Dialing button (☞ Operating
Instructions, 1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your
Telephone”, One-Touch Access for System Features). When the assigned button is pressed, a flash signal is sent during the programmed time in [418].
☞
• Required System Program Address
[110] Flash Key Mode
[418] Flash Time
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “External Feature Access”
3-28
Features
3 Features
F
Flexible Buttons
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can change the flexible buttons on the telephone and DSS console to certain function buttons. For example, if the telephone has more CO buttons than available outside (CO) lines, the unused CO buttons may be changed to One-Touch Dialing buttons, etc.
The 4 types of flexible buttons are as follows:
• Flexible CO Buttons (located on a PT only)
• Flexible DSS Buttons (located on a DSS Console only)
• Programmable Feature (PF) Buttons (located on a DSS Console only)
• Flexible MESSAGE Buttons (located on a PT)
Check the required operation first. If the telephone is not provided with the button, assigning the button can be performed in the Proprietary Telephone Settings.
Function
Programmable Button
DSS PF
✔
MESSAGE
✔
✔ ✔ ✔
DSS (Direct Station Selection)
One-Touch Dialing
CONFERENCE
FWD/DND (Forward/Do Not Disturb)
SAVE
Log-In/Log-Out
Single-CO (S-CO)
Other CO (O-CO)
Group-CO (G-CO)
MESSAGE (Message Waiting)
Day
Night
Lunch
Station Lock
✔
✔
✔
✔
CO
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
☞
“
✔
” indicates that the feature is available.
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”
Features
3-29
H
3 Features
Handset/Headset Selection (KX-T7330 only)
The system supports the use of headsets with proprietary telephones. Switch the selection mode before using the headset (optional).
Handsfree Answerback
Allows a proprietary telephone with a speakerphone to answer an intercom call without lifting the handset. This feature performed by pressing the AUTO ANS/MUTE button.
!
!
☞
• This feature does not work for incoming outside calls or doorphone calls.
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.4 Receiving Calls, “Handsfree Answerback”
Handsfree Operation
Allows a proprietary telephone user to dial and talk to the other party without lifting the handset. Pressing one of the following buttons activates the handsfree mode when the
SP-PHONE/MONITOR button indicator is off:
SP-PHONE button, MONITOR button, INTERCOM button, or CO button.
!
!
☞
• A proprietary telephone with the MONITOR button can perform handsfree dialing operations, etc., but cannot have a handsfree conversation.
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Calls, “Handsfree Operation”
3-30
Features
3 Features
H
Hold
<Call Hold>
Allows an extension user to place an intercom and/or outside call. The held call can be retrieved by the user who held it, or by any other extension (Call Hold Retrieve).
With a single line telephone (SLT), either one outside or intercom call can be held at one time. If an SLT user want to hold both calls, use the Call Park feature. An SLT user can select how to operate the Call Hold feature by program [104].
<Exclusive Hold>
Allows an proprietary telephone user to prevent other extension users from retrieving their held call. Only the user who held the call can retrieve it. This feature is not available for an
SLT.
!
!
• Only one intercom call can be placed on hold. For a proprietary telephone, outside calls and one intercom call can be placed on hold at the same time.
• If a held call is not retrieved within the assigned time in program [200], the extension user who held it will hear a ring tone or an alarm tone. If the user is on-hook and their
SP-PHONE/MONITOR button indicator is off, the phone will ring (Hold Recall). If the user is off-hook or in the handsfree mode, an alarm tone will be sent to the built-in speaker of a proprietary telephone or the handset receiver of a single line telephone at
15-second interval (Hold Alarm).
If “Disable” is selected in program [200], nothing will be heard.
• If a held outside call is not answered within thirty minutes, it will be automatically disconnected.
• For outside calls, music is sent to the external party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
• During a 5-party conference, the Hold feature cannot be activated.
☞
• Required System Programming
[104] Hold Mode Selection
[200] Hold Recall Time
• Related Feature References
Call Park, Music on Hold, Hookswitch Flash
• Operating Instructions References
1.5 During a Conversation, “Placing a Call on Hold (Call Hold)”
1.5 During a Conversation, “Placing a Call on Hold Exclusively (Exclusive Hold)”
1.5 During a Conversation, “Retrieving a Call on Hold (Call Hold Retrieve)”
Features
3-31
H
3 Features
Hookswitch Flash
Flashing the hookswitch is used to allow a single line telephone user to hold a call for transferring or holding, if the flash time is within the assigned time in program [207]. The procedure to transfer a call or hold is determined in program [104] “Hold Mode Selection”.
Flashing the hookswitch can be also used to disconnect a call, if the flash time is more than the assigned time in program [207].
!
!
• If “MODE 1” was selected in program [207], the system will recognize flashing the hookswitch as hooking, while a busy tone or reorder tone is sent or during a conversation.
The system will recognize as 1 being dialed in the pulse mode, while a dial tone is sent.
The system can refuse receiving a pulse signal by selecting “Disable” in program [614].
Therefore, even if the hookswitch is flashed during a dial tone, the system will regard it as hooking.
☞
• Required System Programming
[207] Hookswitch Flash Timing Range Selection
[614] Internal Pulse Detection
Host PBX Access
The system may be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting a line from the host to an outside (CO) line in the system.
!
!
• A Host PBX Access code assigned in program [403] is required to access an outside (CO) line of the host PBX.
• Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible (External Feature Access).
☞
• Required System Programming
[403] Host PBX Access Codes
[417] Pause Time
• Related Feature Reference
External Feature Access
To Central Office
Host PBX
3-32
Features
3 Features
Intercept Routing
Provides automatic redirection of incoming outside calls via the DISA or UCD feature. The
Intercept Routing feature works in the following 2 cases.
1) When nothing is dialed after a dial tone or OGM is sent to the caller. (The DISA feature only)
2) When the call is not answered within a programmed time. This is called Intercept
Routing – No Answer (IRNA).
☞
• Required System Programming
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[507] DISA Intercept Mode
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept
[510] DISA No Dial Mode
[523] UCD Busy Mode
[524] UCD Intercept Mode
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept
• Related Feature References
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
I
Intercom Calling
Allows an extension user to make a call to another extension.
!
!
• An extension number and a name can be assigned in programs [009] and [604]. If assigned, they will be shown on the display proprietary telephone during an intercom call.
• The DSS buttons permit a proprietary telephone user one-touch access to an extension.
The DSS button can be assigned to a flexible CO button in the Proprietary Telephone
Settings.
The DSS buttons on the DSS console can also be used.
• An extension user can press the DSS buttons directly to make an intercom call without going off-hook. This can be enabled by program [126].
☞
• Required System Programming
[009] Extension Number Assignment
[126] DSS Off-Hook Mode
[604] Extension Name Setting
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button
1.3 Making Calls, “Intercom Calling”
1.9 DSS Console Features, “Initial Settings”, Extension Number Assignment
Features
3-33
L
3 Features
Language Selection
The selected language in program [615] is shown on the LCD display of a proprietary telephone during operation and Proprietary Telephone Settings, but not used during System
Programming. The selected language in program [806] is used for an SMDR printout.
☞
• Required System Programming
[615] LCD Language Assignment
[806] SMDR Language Assignment
Limited Call Duration
The system disconnects 2 types of outside outgoing calls when a specific timer expires. One is a call with an external party. The other is an outside–to–outside (CO-to-CO) call using the
Call Forwarding – to Outside (CO) Line, Call Transfer – to Outside (CO) Line feature, or the
DISA feature. Limiting the time of the call can be assigned through System Programming.
!
!
☞
• An alarm tone will be sent to both parties 15 seconds before the assigned time limit.
• Required System Programming
[205] Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Duration Time Limit
[212] Outside (CO) Line Duration Time Limit
[613] Outside (CO) Line Duration Time Limit Selection
• Related Feature References
Call Forwarding – to Outside (CO) Line, Call Transfer – to Outside (CO) Line,
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
3-34
Features
3 Features
L
Line Access Buttons
A proprietary telephone (PT) user must assign one of the following 3 types of CO buttons to flexible CO buttons in the Proprietary Telephone Settings. This allows making or receiving outside calls. The default setting for the flexible CO buttons (CO 1 – CO 6) are Single-CO
(S-CO) buttons. CO 1 corresponds to outside (CO) line 1, CO 2 corresponds to outside
(CO) line 2, etc.
<Group-CO (G-CO) Button>
Receiving or making outside calls is on an outside (CO) line group basis. The outside (CO) line group is assigned in program [404]. Any incoming call from any outside (CO) line in the outside (CO) line group arrives at the G-CO button. To make an outside call, the user can access an idle outside (CO) line in the group by simply pressing the assigned G-CO button.
<Single-CO (S-CO) Button>
Receiving or making outside calls is done using a specific outside (CO) line. An incoming call from the specific outside (CO) line arrives at the S-CO button. To make an outside call, the user can access the specific outside (CO) line by simply pressing the assigned S-CO button.
<Other-CO (O-CO) Button>
Outside (CO) lines, which are not assigned to an S-CO or G-CO button, can be assigned to a flexible CO button as the O-CO button. An incoming call on an outside (CO) lines arrives at the O-CO. To make an outside call, the user simply presses the assigned
O-CO button.
!
!
• The same outside (CO) line group can be assigned to more than one G-CO button on the same PT.
• The same line can be assigned to an S-CO button and G-CO button. The
S-CO button has priority.
• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming calls (disable) can be selected by programs [408] through [413] on an extension-outside (CO) line basis.
• A ringing pattern can be selected for each outside (CO) line by program [423].
☞
• Required System Programming
[400] Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment
[404] Outside (CO) Line Group Assignment
[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[411]–[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[423] Outside (CO) Line Ringing Pattern Selection
• Related Feature References
Ringing Pattern Selection, Outside Calling, Receiving Calls
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
Line Access Buttons
Features
3-35
L-M
3 Features
Log-In/Log-Out
Allows an extension user to join (Log-In) or leave (Log-Out) a hunting, DISA ring or UCD group temporarily. Extensions in the log-out mode will not receive calls by Station Hunting,
DISA or UCD but will receive other calls, not like the Do Not Disturb (DND) feature.
The Log-In/Log-Out button can be assigned to a flexible button in the Proprietary Telephone
Settings. The lighting patterns of the Log-In/Log-Out button on a proprietary telephone and status are as follows.
Off: Log-In mode
Log-In
Red: Log-Out mode
!
!
☞
• There should be at least one extension that is in the
Log-In mode in a group.
UCD Group
Hunting Group
DISA Ring Group
Log-Out
• Related Feature References
Direct Inward System Access (DISA),
Extension Group,
Station Hunting, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
Log-In/Log-Out Button
1.7 Useful Features, “Joining or Leaving a Call Distribution Group (Log-In/Log-Out)”
Message Waiting
Allows an extension user to notify the called extension of a message waiting when the called extension is busy or does not answer the call. Only a proprietary telephone user with a
MESSAGE button can know there is a message waiting if the LED on the MESSAGE button lights red. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button can call back the called party. The messages which are stored in the mailbox of the Voice Processing System can also be heard by following the Voice Mail prompts after pressing the lit MESSAGE button (Voice Mail
Integration).
!
!
• This feature is not available for a proprietary telephone which does not have a MESSAGE button.
• Canceling the message can be performed from the extension sending it or from the extension receiving it.
• Each extension can have a maximum of 8 simultaneous messages.
• Messages are always left at the original extension. They cannot be sent to a Call
Forwarding or Station Hunting destination.
☞
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
Restoring the MESSAGE button
1.7 Useful Features, “Leaving a Message Notification (Message Waiting)”
1.7 Useful Features, “Voice Mail Integration”
3-36
Features
3 Features
M-O
Microphone Mute
Allows a proprietary telephone user to turn off the microphone for privacy.
!
!
☞
• The user’s voice will only be muted during a handsfree conversation. The user can hear the other party’s voice during Microphone Mute.
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.5 During a Conversation, “Turning off the Microphone (Microphone Mute)”
Music on Hold / Background Music (BGM)
While an external party is on hold, music is automatically generated.
!
!
• Operations such as Call Hold and Call Transfer activate Music on Hold.
• A user-supplied external music source, such as a radio, must be connected to the system when “External” is selected in program [111]. One external music source can be connected to the system. The music source is used for Music on Hold and/or BGM.
• When “Tone” is selected in program [111], the cyclic tone is used only for Music on
Hold and the external music source is used for BGM.
☞
• Connection Reference
2.10 External Music Connection
• Required System Programming
[111] Hold Music Selection
• Related Feature References
Hold, Call Transfer – to Extension, Call Transfer – to Outside (CO) line,
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Turning on the Background Music (BGM)”
One-Touch Dialing
!
!
Allows a proprietary telephone user one-touch access to a desired party or system feature.
This is done by storing an extension number, telephone number or a feature number (up to
24 digits) in a One-Touch Dialing button. One-Touch Dialing buttons can be assigned to flexible buttons in the Proprietary Telephone Settings.
• An account code can be stored into a One-Touch Dialing button.
• A number consisting of 25 digits or more can be stored by dividing it and storing it in
2 One-Touch Dialing buttons.
Features
3-37
O
☞
3 Features
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”
One-Touch Dialing button
1.3 Making Calls, “Dialing by Simply Pressing a Button (One-Touch Dialing)”
1.9 DSS Console Features, “Initial Settings”
1.9 DSS Console Features, “One-Touch Dialing”
1.9 DSS Console Features, “One-Touch Access for System Features”
Operator / Manager Extension
The system supports one operator. Any extension can be designated as an operator in program [008]. Extension jack 01 is the system manager extension. The extension assigned as an operator or manager has the ability to perform the following operations.
• Setting the Date and Time
• Canceling the Electronic Station Lockout
• Setting/Canceling the Remote Station Lock
• Setting/Canceling/Confirming the Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Remotely
• Recording and Playing the Outgoing Message
• Changing the Day/Night/Lunch Mode
The manager extension can also perform System Programming and the following operation.
• Setting the Extension Password
☞
• Required System Programming
[008] Operator Assignment
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features
Operator Call
Allows an extension user to call an operator within the system by dialing the feature number assigned in program [121]. One extension can be assigned as the operator in program [008].
!
!
• If an operator is not assigned, this feature is not available and a reorder tone will be heard.
• Every extension user can reach the operator just by dialing the operator call number (0 or
9) assigned in program [121] “Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access Number Selection”.
☞
• Required System Programming
[008] Operator Assignment
[121] Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access Number Selection
• Related Feature Reference
Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access Number
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Calls, “Calling an Operator (Operator Call)”
3-38
Features
3 Features
O
Outgoing Message (OGM)
Allows the extension assigned as an operator or manager to record up to 2 outgoing voice messages (maximum 30 seconds each). This message is played when a caller accesses the
DISA or UCD feature. An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card is required to program the
OGM.
The following are some examples of OGM and flow chart.
Case 1: Receives 2 calls at a time – OGM for DISA.
(Do not want customers to be kept waiting.)
System
OGM1
DISA with
OGM
Outside Call
To the designated destination
OGM2
DISA with
OGM
Outside Call
To the designated destination
OGM1: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”
OGM2: Same as OGM 1
Required Settings: [502] “MODE1”
[414]-[416] “DISA1”
Case 2: Uses the OGM in the day, night and lunch modes – OGM for DISA.
(In the day mode) System
Outside Call
OGM1
DISA with
OGM
To the designated destination
(In the night mode) System
Outside Call
OGM2
DISA with
OGM
The call is disconnected by assigning
“Disconnect” for DISA2 in program
[510] “DISA No Dial Mode”.
OGM1: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”
OGM2: “We are sorry but our office is closed for the day.”
Required Settings: [502] “MODE2”
[414]-[416] “DISA1” for OGM1, “DISA2” for OGM2
Case 3: Uses a different OGM for outside (CO) lines – OGM for DISA.
System
(Outside line 1)
Outside Call
OGM1
DISA with
OGM
To the designated destination
(Outside line 2)
Outside Call
OGM2
DISA with
OGM
To the designated destination
Features
3-39
O
3 Features
3-40
Features
OGM1: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”
OGM2: “This is B company. To contact Mr. A, press 101. To contact Mr. B, press
102.”
Required Settings: [502] “MODE2”
[414]-[416] “DISA1” for the A company outside (CO) line(s).
“DISA2” for the B company outside (CO) line(s).
Case 4: Uses a different OGM when the line is busy – OGM for DISA.
System
OGM1
DISA with
OGM
To the designated destination
Outside Call
The line is busy.
DISA with
OGM
(If the operator is selected.)
To the Operator
OGM2
OGM1: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”
OGM2: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. If you want to call the operator, press 0.”
Required Settings: [502] “MODE2”
[414]-[416] “DISA1”
[506] “DISA2”
Case 5: Distributes calls to the UCD group – OGM for UCD.
System
Outside Call
The line is busy.
OGM1
UCD with
OGM
(When the line is free.)
Outside Call
The line is busy.
OGM2
UCD with
OGM
(When the line is free.)
OGM1: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. Please hold.”
OGM2: Same as OGM1
Required Settings: [502] “MODE3”
[414]-[416] “UCD”
To the UCD group
Case 6: Disconnects a call after the OGM – OGM for UCD.
System
UCD with
OGM
Outside Call
OGM1
The line is busy.
OGM2
The call is disconnected.
OGM1: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. Please hold.”
OGM2: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. Please call back later.”
Required Settings: [502] “MODE4”
[414]-[416] “UCD”
3 Features
O
Case 7: Uses the DISA or UCD feature for outside (CO) lines
– OGM for DISA and UCD.
System
(UCD)
Outside Call
(DISA)
The line is busy.
OGM1
UCD with
OGM
DISA with
OGM
(When the line is free.)
Outside Call
To the designated destination
OGM2
To the UCD group
OGM1: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. Please hold.” (UCD message)
OGM2: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.” (DISA message)
Required Settings: [502] “MODE5”
[414]-[416] “DISA1” for outside (CO) line(s) which use the DISA feature
“UCD” for outside (CO) line(s) which use the UCD feature
!
!
☞
• An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card is required to program the OGM.
• Connection Reference
2.15 OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation
• Required System Programming
[414]–[416] Outside (CO) Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch
[502] OGM Mode Selection
[506] DISA Busy Mode
• Related Feature References
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Outgoing Message (OGM)”
Features
3-41
O
3 Features
Outside Calling
Allows an extension user to make a call to an external party by using one of the following line access methods.
<Automatic Line Access>
Allows an extension user to select an available outside (CO) line automatically from the assigned lines in program [419] by pressing the Automatic Line Access number (0 or 9). For a proprietary telephone, a Line Access Button assignment (S-CO, G-CO, O-CO) in the
Proprietary Telephone Settings is required. If Idle Line Preference is set on the telephone in the Proprietary Telephone Settings, the user can access an idle line only by going off-hook.
<Individual Line Access>
Allows a proprietary telephone user to select the desired outside (CO) line by pressing the
CO button assigned as the S-CO button. A Line Access Button assignment (S-CO) is required before use.
<Outside (CO) Line Group Access>
Allows an extension user to select an idle line within a designated outside (CO) line group.
An outside (CO) line group is assigned in program [404]. To specify an outside (CO) line group, dial the feature number “8” and the desired outside (CO) line group number
(1 through 6). A proprietary telephone user can also specify an outside (CO) line group by pressing a G-CO button. A Line Access Button assignment (G-CO) is required before use. If
Idle Line Preference is set on the telephone in the Proprietary Telephone Settings, the user can access an idle line only by going off-hook.
!
!
• Each extension requires System Programming to access outside (CO) lines.
• After an outside (CO) line is seized, the system waits for the assigned time in program
[206] before dialing.
☞
• Required System Programming
[206] Dialing Start Time
[400] Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment
[404] Outside (CO) Line Group Assignment
[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[419] Automatic Designated Outside (CO) Line Access
• Related Feature References
Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access Number
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing, Line Access Buttons
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing Your Telephone Functions”,
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
Line Access Buttons
1.3 Making Calls, “Outside Calling”
3-42
Features
3 Features
O-P
Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
!
!
☞
When an outside call is received at an extension, the user can select whether their extension will ring or not.
• Select “Enable” in programs [408]–[410].
• Required System Programming
[408]–[410] “Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing Your Telephone Functions”,
Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
Paging
Allows an extension user to make a voice announcement to several people at the same time.
The message is announced over the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones and/or the external pager. The paged person can answer the page (Answering a Page) from any extension within the system. The following types are available.
All Extensions: Makes a voice announcement to all extensions over the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones.
Group: Makes a voice announcement to the designated extension group over the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones. An extension group is assigned in program [600] “Extension Group Assignment”.
External: Makes a voice announcement over the external pager.
All Extensions & : Makes a voice announcement to all extensions over the built-in
External
speakers of proprietary telephones and the external pager.
!
!
☞
• An extension user can also transfer a call after paging (Paging and Transfer). Also, pages can be denied (Paging Deny).
• An external pager (user-supplied) must be connected beforehand. One external pager can be connected to the system.
• A confirmation tone is sent to the extensions before the voice announcement or answering.
• A confirmation tone is sent to the external pager before the voice announcement. The tone to the external pager can be disabled in program [106].
• An extension which has set the Do Not Disturb (DND) or Paging Deny feature, or is in use cannot be paged.
• Connection Reference
2.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
• Required System Programming
[106] External Paging Access Tone
• Related Feature References
Extension Group, Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.5 During a Conversation, “Paging”
3-43
Features
P
3 Features
Paralleled Telephone Connection
Any analog proprietary telephone can be connected in parallel with a single line device, such as a single line telephone, facsimile and data terminal.
!
!
☞
• System Programming is required.
• Connection Reference
2.11 Paralleled Telephone Connection
• Required System Programming
[610] Paralleled Telephone Connection
• Related Feature Reference
Power Failure Transfer
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Parallel Connection of a Proprietary Telephone and Single Line
Telephone (Paralleled Telephone Connection)”
Personal Speed Dialing
Allows an extension user to store up to 10 speed dialing numbers (0 through 9) with a maximum of 24 digits per number. An extension number, telephone number or feature number can be stored. For example, storing extension numbers for each room in a house can be useful. (1 = Living Room, 2 = Kitchen, etc.) To make a call, dial # and the number.
!
!
☞
• A rotary telephone user cannot use this feature.
• Operating Instructions References
1.3 Making Call, “Dialing with Personal Speed Dialing (Personal Speed Dialing)”
3-44
Features
3 Features
Pickup Dialing
Allows a single line telephone user to make an outgoing call by going off-hook, if the user has stored the telephone number (up to 32 digits) beforehand. This feature is also known as
Hot Line.
!
!
• A rotary telephone cannot program this feature.
• The user can set and cancel this feature.
• If the feature is activated and the user goes off-hook, a dial tone will be generated for the delay time assigned in program [203] and then dialing will start. During the delay time, the user can dial another party overriding the Pickup Dialing function.
☞
• Required System Programming
[203] Pickup Dial Delay Time
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Call, “Dialing by Simply Going Off-Hook (Pickup Dialing)”
P
Polarity Reverse Detection
The circuit in the system can detect an outside (CO) line polarity reverse signal from the
Central Office when trying to make an outside call. This detects the start (a called party goes off-hook) and end (the called party goes on-hook) of an outgoing outside call. The conversation time can be verified on the SMDR printout using this feature.
When an outside call is received, the circuit can also detect the polarity reverse signal before ringing.
☞
• Required System Programming
[424] Reverse (Polarity) Circuit Assignment
• Related Feature Reference
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Features
3-45
P
3 Features
Power Failure Transfer
!
!
☞
During a power failure, specific extension telephones are automatically connected to specific outside (CO) lines. This provides outside (CO) line conversations between the following extensions and outside (CO) lines.
Outside (CO) line 1 : extension jack 01
Outside (CO) line 4 : extension jack 09
A single line telephone (SLT) can work in case of a power failure. Connect an SLT to the above extension jack. For more information, refer to the Operating Instructions.
• All other conversations, except the above combinations, are disconnected during a power failure.
• Only an outside (CO) line can have a conversation. All other features do not work.
• We recommend connecting a single line telephone (SLT) in parallel at extension jacks 01 and 09, so that an SLT can be used during a power failure.
• Connection Reference
2.19 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer
• Related Feature Reference
Paralleled Telephone Connection
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Power Failure Transfer”
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming
!
!
☞
A proprietary telephone user can select the method to answer incoming outside calls from the following 3 line preferences. System Programming and Proprietary Telephone Settings are required.
No Line Preference: When an incoming call is received, the extension user must go off-hook and then press the flashing CO button.
Prime Line Preference: When incoming calls are received at the same time, the user can receive the call on the preferred outside (CO) line by only going off-hook.
Ringing Line Preference: When an incoming call is received, the user can receive the call ringing at their telephone by going off-hook.
• A single line telephone can only set “Ringing Line Preference”.
• Line access button(s) (Single-CO, Other-CO or Group-CO) should be assigned to CO button(s) beforehand.
• Required System Programming
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[411]–[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
• Related Feature Reference
Line Access Buttons
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing Your Telephone Functions”,
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
Line Access Buttons
3-46
Features
3 Features
P
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing
A proprietary telephone user can select a desired outgoing line preference to make outside calls from the following 3 line preferences. System Programming and Proprietary Telephone
Settings are required.
Idle Line Preference: When the user goes off-hook, they are connected to an idle line.
An idle line is automatically selected from the pre-assigned lines in program [419].
Prime Line Preference: When the user goes off-hook, they are connected to the preassigned line. Assign one prime line beforehand.
No Line Preference: No line is selected when the user goes off-hook. They must select a line to make a call.
!
!
☞
• Line access button(s) (Single-CO, Other-CO or Group-CO) should be assigned to the CO button(s) beforehand.
• Required System Programming
[400] Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment
[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[419] Automatic Designated Outside (CO) Line Access
• Related Feature Reference
Line Access Buttons
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing Your Telephone Functions”,
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
Line Access Buttons
Proprietary Telephone Setting Data Default Set
Allows a proprietary telephone user to reset the following Proprietary Telephone Settings to the default settings.
• Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing
• Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming
• Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
• Intercom Alert Assignment
• Call Waiting Tone Selection
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing Your Telephone Functions”,
Proprietary Telephone Setting Data Default Set
Features
3-47
P-R
3 Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Allows an extension user to change the dialing mode from Pulse to Tone after entering a telephone number to access services, such as computer telephone services or Voice Mail, which require tones.
!
!
• This feature only works for outside (CO) lines which have set “Pulse Mode” or ”Call
Blocking Mode” in program [401].
• Changing from Tone to Pulse is not possible.
☞
• Required System Programming
[401] Dial Mode
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Pulse to Tone Conversion”
Receiving Calls
Allows an extension user to receive an intercom or outside call by going off-hook. A proprietary telephone user can also receive a call by pressing the rapid flashing CO or
INTERCOM button, and talk (handsfree mode) if the telephone has the SP-PHONE button.
!
!
☞
• A proprietary telephone user can select the Line Preference for incoming outside calls.
See “Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming” in this section.
• Required System Programming
[408]–[410] “Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch”
[411]–[413] “Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch”
• Related Feature Reference
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.4 Receiving Calls, “Receiving Calls”
Redial
<Automatic Redial>
Allows a proprietary telephone user to redial the last number dialed, and saved number by the Saved Number Redial feature automatically. This is done by pressing the SP-PHONE or
MONITOR button and the corresponding button. Redial will be automatically repeated 3 times until the called party answers. If another operation is performed during Automatic
Redial, this function will be canceled.
<Last Number Redial>
Every extension automatically saves the last telephone number dialed so that the extension user can make a call to the same party later using a simple operation.
3-48
Features
3 Features
R
☞
<Saved Number Redial>
Allows a proprietary telephone user to save the current external telephone number in the
SAVE button during a conversation, so that the extension user can redial the same party later using a simple operation. The saved number can be redialed until another number is stored.
A flexible button can be assigned as the SAVE button in the Proprietary Telephone Settings.
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
SAVE button
1.3 Making Calls, “Redialing Automatically (Automatic Redial)”
1.3 Making Calls, “Redialing the Last Number Dialed (Last Number Redial)”
1.3 Making Calls, “Redialing the Saved Number (Saved Number Redial)”
Ringing Pattern Selection
A ringing pattern can be selected depending on the type of call such as an outside call, intercom call and doorphone call. Available ringing patterns are as follows:
1 s
Single:
Double:
Triple:
S-Double:
(Doorphone only)
!
!
• Private calls can be distinguished from business calls by assigning different ringing per outside (CO) line. Moreover, by assigning different ringing, intercom calls and doorphone calls can be distinguished from other calls. Therefore, careful attention should be applied to all ringing assignments.
☞
• Required System Programming
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection
[423] Outside (CO) Line Ringing Pattern Selection
[706] Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection
• Related Feature Reference
Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
Features
3-49
R-S
3 Features
Room Monitor
Allows a proprietary telephone user to monitor a room or the front door through another proprietary telephone or doorphone without them knowing. The access tone will not be sent to the monitored proprietary telephone when monitoring starts.
!
!
• The extensions that can be monitored must be programmed in [612] before operation when using a proprietary telephone.
• If a doorphone is used as a room monitor, the access tone will be heard when monitoring starts as the default setting. The tone can be disabled in program [707].
• This feature is not available for a proprietary telephone without the AUTO ANS/MUTE button.
• A single line telephone with a MUTE button can be used for monitoring.
☞
• Required System Programming
[612] Room Monitor Assignment
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection
• Related Feature Reference
Doorphone Call
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Room Monitor”
Secret Dialing
Allows a proprietary telephone user to conceal all or part(s) of a System Speed Dialing number assigned in program [001] or One-Touch Dialing number assigned to a flexible button in the Proprietary Telephone Settings which normally appear on the display.
!
!
• When storing a number, press the INTERCOM button at the beginning and the end of the numbers to be concealed.
• One or more parts of a telephone number can be concealed.
• Printing out the concealed number on a SMDR can be assigned in program [803].
☞
• Required System Programming
[001] System Speed Dialing Entry
[803] Secret Speed Dialing/One-Touch Dialing Printing
• Related Feature References
One-Touch Dialing, System Speed Dialing
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
One-Touch Dialing Button
1.7 Useful Features, “Secret Dialing”
3-50
Features
3 Features
S
Self-Extension Number Confirmation (KX-T7330 only)
Allows a display proprietary telephone user to confirm their jack and extension number using a simple operation.
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Self-Extension Number Confirmation (KX-T7330 only)”
Station Feature Clear
Allows an extension user to reset the following station features to the default settings.
• Absent Message Capability
• Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
• Background Music (BGM)
• Call Forwarding
• Call Pickup Deny
• Call Waiting
• Data Line Security
• Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Executive Busy Override Deny
• Log-In/Log-Out
• Message Waiting – (All messages will be erased.)
• Pickup Dialing – (The stored telephone number will be erased.)
• Paging Deny
• Room Monitor
• Timed Reminder
• Voice Mail Integration
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Canceling the Feature Settings (Station Feature Clear)”
Features
3-51
S
3 Features
Station Hunting
If a called extension is busy, Station Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle extension in an extension group in numerical order. Idle extensions are automatically hunted according to programming. The following 2 hunting types are available.
Circular hunting:
The extensions are hunted one time in numerical order. If all extensions are busy, a busy tone will be heard.
Terminate hunting:
The extensions are hunted until the extension which has the highest jack number in the group is reached. If all higher order numbers are busy, the search will end and a busy tone will be heard.
!
!
☞
• One hunting type can be selected for each extension group.
• To leave the hunting group temporarily, use the Log-Out feature. To rejoin, use the
Log-In feature.
• If the called extension has set Do Not Disturb (DND), Call Forwarding or Log-Out,
Station Hunting will skip the extension. However, Station Hunting will not skip the extension which receives the call first, even if it has set Do Not Disturb (DND) or Call
Forwarding.
Circular Hunting Terminate
• Required System Programming
[100] Hunting Group Set
[101] Hunting Type
[600] Extension Group Assignment
• Related Feature References
Call Forwarding
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Extension Group
Log-In/Log-Out
Busy Tone
3-52
Features
3 Features
S
Station Lock
<Electronic Station Lockout>
Allows an extension user to lock their station so that other users cannot make outside calls until it is unlocked. Any 4-digit code can be used to lock and unlock an extension.
<Electronic Station Lockout – CANCEL ALL>
The operator and manager can cancel Electronic Station Lockout of all extensions at one time.
<Remote Station Lock Control>
The operator and manager are given the privilege of controlling Electronic Station Lockout at any station by using the DSS console. The operator and manager can see the status of each extension, locked or unlocked, by the pre-assigned DSS button LED on the DSS console.
For example, this feature is useful for a small hotel or motel when guests are checked out.
!
!
• The Remote Station Lock Control overrides the Electronic Station Lockout. If the operator or manager sets Remote Station Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user, the user cannot unlock it.
• A toll restriction class can be assigned to an extension which has set the Electronic Station
Lockout and Remote Station Lock Control features in program [312] “Toll Restriction –
Station Lock Boundary Class”. Certain types of outgoing outside calls are allowed depending on the assigned toll restriction class.
☞
• Operating Instructions References
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk, “Locking Your Telephone (Electronic Station Lockout)”
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Electronic Station Lockout – CANCEL
ALL”
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Remote Station Lock”
1.9 DSS Console Features “Initial Settings”, Station Lock Button Assignment
(Operator/Manager only)
Features
3-53
S
3 Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically prints out detailed call information of outside calls. A printer connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to print incoming and outgoing outside calls, as well as print a hard copy of System
Programming. To print out the record of System Programming items that have been assigned, use program [804] “System Data Dump”. To print the call records, use program
[802] “Incoming/ Outgoing Call Selection for Printing”, which prints out the following records.
• A record of all outgoing outside calls or outgoing toll calls
• A record of all incoming outside calls
An example of a printed call record:
Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Duration Code
12/31/98 12:52PM 103
12/31/98 12:53PM 103
12/31/98 *12:54PM 101
12/31/98 1:04PM 103
12/31/98 1:04PM 102
12/31/98 1:05PM 103
12/31/98 1:06PM 103
12/31/98 1:06PM C-05 02
12/31/98 1:07PM 103 01
12/31/98 2:15PM 103
12/31/98 2:26PM 103
01
01
12/31/98 2:27PM 116
12/31/98 3:25PM
• •
•
(1)
•
(2)
•
•
(3)
05
02
•
•
(4)
06
05
01
01
05
02
02
12345678901234567890123456789012
<
< incoming incoming
092. . . 1438
>
>
092123456789
0921234567
0921234567
0921234567
F/0927654321
9=0924567123
•
•
(5)
00:00'16 . . . .
00:01'43 . . . .
00:07'48 . . . .
00:00'06 4536
00:00'09 . . . .
0
00:00'08 . . . .
0
00:00'08 . . . .
00:00'17 . . . .
2
00:11'00 . . 13
00:11'00 . 101
00:03'00 . . . .
00:13'55 . . . .
00:11'48 . . . .
• •
•
(6)
•
(7)
Example of the SMDR printout format:
Explanation
(1) Date : shows the date of the call as Month/Day/Year.
(2) Time : shows the time the call was started as Hour: Minute/AM or PM.
“
*
” indicates a transferred call.
(3) Ext. : shows the extension number, etc. that engaged in the call. “C-xx” indicates an outside-to-outside (CO-to-CO) call via the DISA feature. The outside (CO) line which receives a DISA call is shown as xx.
(4) CO : shows the outside (CO) line number used for the call.
(5) Dial number
Outgoing call:
Received call:
Shows the called party’s telephone number (maximum 32 digits).
Valid digits are 0 through 9, #, and P (if the PAUSE button was pressed).
Shows <incoming>. An incoming call via the DISA feature is shown as <DISA incoming>, via the DIL feature is shown as
<DIL incoming>.
3-54
Features
3 Features
UCD waiting call: Shows <UCD waiting> for an incoming call via the UCD feature.
When the “UCD waiting call” is answered, it becomes a
“Received call” and a new record is started.
(6) Duration : shows the duration of the call or the UCD call waiting time in
Hours/Minutes/Seconds.
(7) Code: shows the account code appended to the call, account code index number
(e.g.: 13), the extension number which uses the Walking COS feature
(e.g.: 101) or DISA security code status (e.g.: 0). Code “0” indicates a DISA incoming call without a DISA security code. Codes “1 to 4” indicate a DISA incoming call with DISA security code 01 to 04 respectively. DISA security codes are never printed out by SMDR.
!
!
• This system can store information of up to 64 calls.
• This data is not deleted even when the system is reset.
• If FLASH is manually sent out during a conversation to make another call without hanging up, etc., a call record will be printed and a new record started. “F/” will be printed at the beginning of the dial number on the new record.
• When a host PBX code is entered, “=” will be printed between the code and dialed number.
• The language used for an SMDR printout can be selected in program [806].
☞
• Connection Reference
2.13 Printer and PC Connection
• Required System Programming
[000] Date and Time Setting
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters
[801] SMDR Parameter
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing
[803] Secret Speed Dialing/One-Touch Dialing Printing
[804] System Data Dump
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection
[806] SMDR Language Assignment
• Related Feature Reference
Language Selection
S
System Data Default Set
This system can re-initialize the system-programmed data. If all the programmed data is cleared, the system will reset using the default settings by program [999].
!
!
☞
• The default setting for each programming item is listed in Section 5.1, Default Values.
• Required System Programming
[999] System Data Clear
• Installation Reference
2.24 System Data Clear
Features
3-55
S-T
3 Features
System Speed Dialing
The system supports 100 System Speed Dial numbers (up to 32 digits) assigned in program
[001] that are available to all extension users. A System Speed Dial number is dialed out using a simple operation.
Each System Speed Dial number can be assigned a name in program [011]. The assigned name will be displayed when making a call by using the System Speed Dialing feature. It will also be displayed when an external caller’s telephone number matches one of System
Speed Dialing numbers and a Telephone Company does not provide the caller’s name.
!
!
☞
• Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing can be assigned by program [301].
• A rotary telephone user cannot use this feature.
• Required System Programming
[001] System Speed Dialing Entry
[011] System Speed Dialing Name Setting
[301] Toll Restriction – System Speed Dialing Boundary Class
• Related Feature
Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing
• Operating Instructions for the Caller ID Card References
Section 1.2, System Features
Caller ID
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Calls, “Dialing with System Speed Dialing (System Speed Dialing)”
Timed Reminder
<Timed Reminder>
Allows an extension user to generate an alarm tone at a preset time as a wake-up alarm or a reminder. The user can set this to be activated once or everyday.
<Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)>
The operator or manager can remotely set, cancel and confirm the Timed Reminder of the desired extension.
For example, this is useful for a small hotel or motel to set an extension in a guest room as a wake-up call, or set an extension in a child’s room by a mother.
☞
• Operating Instructions References
1.7 Useful Features, “Alarm Setting (Timed
Reminder)”
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)”
3-56
Features
3 Features
T
Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service
The system supports the day, night and lunch operation modes. The system operation for making and receiving calls can be different for the day, night and lunch modes. The system operation for toll restriction can be arranged to prevent unauthorized toll calls for each mode.
Time service can be set automatically or manually by program [006].
Changing the Day/Night/Lunch Modes
The day, night and lunch modes can be changed either automatically at an assigned time in program [007] or manually by the operator or manager at any desired time.
!
!
• The lunch mode interrupts the day or night mode. After the lunch mode is finished, the day or night mode starts again.
• If the lunch mode is set using feature number “783#” in the automatic mode, the mode can only be canceled by using feature number “780#”. This can be useful during holidays. The day and night modes are automatically changed at the programmed time in
[007] even if feature number “780#” is not entered. These operations can only be done by an operator or manager.
• The operator and manager can see the status of the mode (day, night or lunch) by the preassigned DSS buttons’ LED on the DSS console. Time service can be changed easily by pressing the pre-assigned DSS buttons.
• The following programming items will be affected by the time service.
[405]-[407] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment
[411]-[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment
[414]-[416] Outside (CO) Line Mode
[601]-[603] TRS – Class of Service Assignment
[700]-[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment
[703]-[705] Door Opener Assignment
LUNCH
☞
• Required System Programming
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time
• Operating Instructions References
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Setting”
1.9 DSS Console Features, “Initial Settings”, Day, Night and Lunch Buttons
Assignment
Features
3-57
T
3 Features
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction is a system programmable feature that can prohibit certain extension users from making unauthorized toll calls.
Every extension is programmed to belong to one of 5 classes of service (COS). Each COS is programmed to have a toll restriction class for day mode, night mode and lunch mode.
There are 5 toll restriction COS numbers available. Toll restriction COS number 1 is the highest class and the COS number 5 is the lowest. That is, COS number 1 allows all toll calls. COS numbers 2 through 5 are used to restrict calls by combining pre-programmed deny and exception codes shown in the table on the next page.
Denied Codes
An outgoing outside call made by an extension with a toll restriction COS number between 2 and 5 is first checked against the assigned denied codes in program [302]-[305].
If the first digits of the dialed number (not including the line access code) are not found in the class, the call can be made. Each class can store up to 20 denied codes, each consisting of 11 digits.
Exception Codes
These codes are used to override a programmed denied code. A call denied by the denied codes is checked against the selected exception codes assigned in program [306]. If a match is found, the call can be made.
Up to 80 exception codes, each consisting of 11 digits, can be stored. The available number of codes depends on the COS number.
!
!
☞
• Emergency numbers, such as the police or fire station, should be stored in program
[309] “Emergency Dial Number Set” so that they are excepted from toll restriction.
• If a stored Host PBX access code in program [403] “Host PBX Access Codes” or a stored carrier code in program [300] “Carrier Excepted Code Assignment” is found in the dialed number, the subsequent telephone numbers will be checked for toll restriction.
• The interdigit timer assigned in program [208] “Interdigit Time” applies until the toll restriction check is completed. When the timer expires, an outside outgoing call will be disconnected while dialing, if “Enable” was selected in program [211] “No Dial
Disconnection”.
• The toll restriction class for a station locked extension can be assigned in program [312]
“Toll Restriction – Station Lock Boundary Class” so that even a station locked extension can make a local call, etc.
• It is programmable whether the “ ” or “#” the user dials is to be checked or not on the
Toll Restriction code in program [125] “Toll Restriction Check for and #”. This is useful to prevent unauthorized calls which could be possible through certain Central
Office exchange systems.
• Required System Programming
[301] Toll Restriction – System Speed Dialing Boundary Class
[302]-[305] Toll Restriction – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes
[306] Toll Restriction – Exception Codes
[601]-[603] TRS – Class of Service Assignment – Day/Night/Lunch
• Related Feature References
Emergency Call
Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing
Toll Restriction Override by Account Codes
Toll Restriction – Station Lock Boundary Class
3-58
Features
3 Features
T
Combination of denied codes and exception codes
COS No.
1
2
3
4
5
No restriction.
Denied Calls
20 denied codes programmed in [302].
20 denied codes programmed in [302] plus
20 denied codes programmed in [303].
20 denied codes programmed in [302] plus
20 denied codes programmed in [303] plus
20 denied codes programmed in [304].
20 denied codes programmed in [302] plus
20 denied codes programmed in [303] plus
20 denied codes programmed in [304] plus
20 denied codes programmed in [305].
Excepted Calls
No restriction.
80 exception codes (code numbers 01-80) programmed in [306].
60 exception codes (code numbers 01-60) programmed in [306].
40 exception codes (code numbers 01-40) programmed in [306].
20 exception codes (code numbers 01-20) programmed in [306].
Flow chart of Toll Restriction
The user makes a toll call.
Is it a System Speed Dialing number?
Yes
*1
No
Yes
Is the COS number higher than the system speed dialing boundary class?
No or Equal
COS1
*2
What is the
COS number?
COS2 - 5
Is the dialed number found in applicable denied codes?
Yes
Is the dialed number found in applicable exception codes?
No
The call is denied. A reorder tone is returned to the user.
No
Yes
The call is allowed.
*1: System Speed Dialing numbers are assigned in program [001] “System
Speed Dialing Entry”.
*2: The system speed dialing boundary class is assigned in program [301] “Toll
Restriction – System Speed
Dialing Boundary Class”.
Features
3-59
T
3 Features
Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing
Calls originated by System Speed Dialing are restricted depending on the combination of the
System Speed Dialing Boundary Class assigned in program [301] and the class of service
(COS) assigned to each extension as follows.
COS
No.
System Speed
Dialing Boundary
Class
1
2
3
4
5
C
C
1
A
C
C
A: allowed C: checked
A
C
2
A
C
C
A
A
3
A
C
C
A
A
4
A
A
C
A
A
5
A
A
A
<Example>
—If the boundary is set to
COS number 2,
The system will allow system speed dialing for COS numbers 1 and 2, but check COS numbers 3,
4 and 5 according to toll restriction.
☞
• Required System Programming
[301] Toll Restriction – System Speed Dialing Boundary Class
• Related Feature Reference
Toll Restriction
3-60
Features
3 Features
Toll Restriction Override by Extension Password
Allows an extension user to override toll restriction temporarily to make a toll call from another toll-restricted extension. The user can carry out this feature by entering their extension password, instead of an account code, before dialing the telephone number. The user can make a toll call with their COS number.
!
!
• The account code “Verify–Toll” mode at another extension permits users to override another extension’s toll restrictions.
• If the user does not enter the extension password or enters an invalid password, a regular toll restriction check is done.
• When a user makes a call using this feature, the user’s extension number will be displayed on the SMDR, not the extension where the user made the call.
• Users can also override toll restriction of another extension by using the Walking COS feature.
• To override toll restriction in the “Option”, “Forced” or “Verify–All” mode, use the
Walking COS feature.
Flow chart of TRS Override
TRS Override by Extension password is attempted.
☞
Option/Forced
Verify –All Calls
What is the account code mode?
Verify–Toll
Is the entered password valid?
Yes
No Is the entered code identified with a stored account code?
The Toll Restriction COS number will become the password extension user's COS number temporarily
Yes
No
The Toll Restriction COS number remains the same as the extension being used.
The call is not allowed.
A r eorder tone is returned to the user.
• Required System Programming
[605] Account Code Entry Mode
• Related Feature References
Account Code Entry, Extension Password/System Password,
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), Toll Restriction, Walking COS
T
Features
3-61
T-U
3 Features
Toll Restriction — Station Lock Boundary Class
Allows assigning a toll restriction class for extensions where the Electronic Station Lockout or Remote Station Lock feature has been set.
An extension user usually cannot make an outside call at a locked extension, however if a toll restriction class is assigned in program [312], the user can make an outside call at the locked extension.
!
!
• The higher toll restriction class number will take precedence.
For example, if toll restriction COS number 3 is assigned to an extension and the station lock boundary class is 4, the extension user is allowed to make a call with toll restriction
COS number 4.
☞
• Required System Program Address
[312] Toll Restriction – Station Lock Boundary Class
• Related Feature References
Station Lock, Toll Restriction
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Distributes incoming calls to one specific extension group called a UCD group assigned in program [520]. Calls to the UCD group hunt for an idle extension in numerical order. The
UCD feature is particularly helpful when a certain extension receives a high volume of calls compared with other extensions.
!
!
• An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card is required to perform the UCD feature.
• The Log-In or Log-Out status can be set on an extension basis. There should be at least one extension that is in Log -In status in the UCD group.
• An extension which sets the Call Forwarding–All, –Busy or No Answer, or the Do Not
Disturb (DND) feature is skipped during circular calling.
• When all extensions in the UCD group are busy, a busy message is heard and then Music on Hold is activated. If any extension in the UCD group is not available within the programmed time period, then (1) an OGM will be heard and the call is disconnected, or
(2) the call will be sent to pre-programmed extension(s) in [408]-[410]. System
Programming is required for this operation. Refer to the “Flow chart of possible cases and results for UCD calls”.
☞
• Connection Reference
2.15 OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation
• Required System Programming
[111] Hold Music Selection
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment – Day/Night/Lunch
[414]–[416] Outside (CO) Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch
[502] OGM Mode Selection
[513] Cyclic Tone Detection
[520] UCD Group
3-62
Features
3 Features
[521] UCD Busy Waiting Time
[522] UCD OGM Message Interval Time
[523] UCD Busy Mode
[524] UCD Intercept Mode
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept
[600] Extension Group Assignment
• Related Feature References
Call Forwarding, Do Not Disturb (DND), Extension Group, Log-In/Log-Out
Outline of a UCD
(1) When a number of calls have arrived at the UCD group, the first call arrives at extension A first.
(2) When the first call arrives at extension
A, the second call arrives at extension B.
Calls have arrived at the UCD group.
3rd call in queue
2nd call in queue
3rd call in queue
2nd call in queue
1st call in queue
UCD group
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@h?
@@h?
@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@ @@ @@
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
Extension A
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ sion B.)
Extension B sion C.)
Extension C
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ sion A.)
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@g @@g
@@g @@g @@g
@@@@@@@@ @@g @@@@@@@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
?@@ ?@@
?@@ ?@@ ?@@
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@ ?@@ ?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
-
UCD group
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@
@@h?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?
@@h?
@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@ @@ @@
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
Extension B
@@
@@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ sion C.)
Extension C
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
Extension A
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@g @@g
@@g @@g @@g
@@@@@@@@ @@g @@@@@@@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
?@@ ?@@
?@@ ?@@ ?@@
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@ ?@@ ?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
(3) When the second call arrives at extension B, the third call will arrive at extension C.
U
Features
3-63
U
Flow chart of possible cases and results for UCD calls
3 Features
An outside line call is made.
The caller reaches the UCD group.
A
Busy
B
Call
OGM
*1
Music on Hold is heard.
*2
Answered.
The call is not answered.
Busy
Has the UCD Busy
Waiting Time expired?
*4
Goes to
Call
*3
B
C
Yes
Is Intercept Routing employed?
No
No
Yes
The call is sent to another extension.
*10
Disconnect.
Goes to
A
*5
Is Intercept Routing employed?
*6
No
Yes
Goes to C
Answered.
The call is not answered.
What is the
OGM Mode?
*7
Disconnect.
*9
MODE3 or MODE5 MODE4
*9
*8
Busy tone
Disconnect.
The other
OGM is heard.
Disconnect.
3-64
Features
3 Features
U
*1: An OGM is sent to the caller.
When the system detects a cyclic tone or CPC signal while the OGM is being sent, the call is disconnected.
*2: Music on hold is selected in program [111] as follows.
• External – Uses an external music source, such as a radio.
• Internal – Uses the internal music source equipped with the system.
• Tone – Uses the cyclic tone equipped with the system.
*3: When an extension in the UCD group is available.
*4: The system holds the call until the assigned time in program [521] expires.
*5: OGM repeats the assigned time intervals in program [522] within the assigned time in program
[521].
*6: The system treats the call according to program [523] as follows when the assigned time in
[521] expires.
• Disconnect – the call is disconnected.
• Intercept – the call is sent to the extensions programmed in [408]-[410].
*7: The other OGM (OGM2) is selected in program [502].
*8: The system treats the call according to program [524] as follows when the assigned time in
[525] expires.
• Disconnect – the call is disconnected.
• Intercept – the call is sent to the extensions programmed in [408]-[410].
*9: If the caller did not hear an OGM, the call will not be disconnected until the caller goes onhook.
*10: The UCD Ring Timer after Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in program [526]. If the call is not answered during the programmed time, the call will be disconnected.
Features
3-65
V
3 Features
Voice Mail Integration
This system supports Voice Processing System (VPS) equipment by sending DTMF tones described in program [103]. The DTMF tones sent to a VPS indicate the state of a call
(busy, answered, ringing, disconnected, etc.). The DTMF tones also inform a VPS of the destination of a call transferred to the VPS by the Call Forwarding or DISA Intercept
Routing – No Answer feature. Up to 4 VPSs can be connected to the extension jacks as extensions in the system.
System Explanation
1. Voice Mail Service
1.1 Call Forwarding to VM
If an extension user sets Call Forwarding (C. FWD) whose destination is the VPS, an incoming call is forwarded to the VPS. The system sends the VPS the extension mailbox number at that time. Therefore, the calling party can leave their message in the mailbox of the desired extension without having to know the mailbox number.
Outside Call
DIL, DISA
System
Intercom
Call
Extension
C.FWD
VPS
VM 1
VM 4
VM Hunting
Chain
VM 2
VM 3
Outside Call
DIL, DISA
System
Operator
Transfer
Extension
C.FWD
VM 1
VM 4
VPS
VM Hunting
Chain
VM 2
VM 3
3-66
Features
3 Features
1.2 DISA Intercept to VM
If the VPS is set as the Intercept destination of an outside (CO) line, an outside call is forwarded to the VPS. The system sends the VPS the extension mailbox number at that time. Therefore, the calling party can leave their message in the mailbox of the desired extension without having to know the mailbox number. If a DISA call is transferred to the VPS by Intercept Routing from a DISA ring group, your system will transmit the mailbox number of the lowest jack number of the DISA ring group. Delayed Ringing must be assigned to VPS extensions in programs [411]-[413].
V
Outside Call
DISA
System
Extension
Intercept
VM 1
VM 2
VM 3
VM 4
1.3 Listening to a Recorded Message
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS can turn on the MESSAGE button indicator on the corresponding proprietary telephone to notify to the user. (Panasonic KX-TVP series can do this.) The VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in their mailbox. When the MESSAGE button indicator is lit, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the stored message. A single line telephone user hears dial tone 3 (
☞ “Distinctive Dial Tones” in this section) when going off-hook if there are messages in their mailbox. They can call the voice mail extension to listen to their messages. In this case, they must listen to all of the messages. Once they access voice mail, dial tone 3 will be eliminated and not be heard next time they go off-hook. Therefore, they will not know even if there are messages left.
Features
3-67
V
3 Features
2. Automated Attendant (AA) Service
2.1 AA to Extension
AA receives and answers outside calls and offers services such as transferring to an extension or mailbox using DTMF signaling, which is sent from the calling party.
Outside Call
DIL, UCD
System
Extension
Transfer
VPS
AA 1
AA 4
AA Hunting Chain or UCD Group
AA 2
AA 3
!
!
• A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features.
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer
DISA Intercept Routing – No Answer
In these functions, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS.
• The mailbox number is the same as its extension number.
• The Voice Mail extension should set Data Line Security to achieve proper recording.
• If your VPS is a Panasonic KX-TVP series and KX-TA308 cannot be selected in the PBX type setup menu, select “KX-T1232”. Follow the steps for a KX-T1232.
☞
• Connection Reference
2.8 Extension Connection
• Required System Programming
[009] Extension Number Assignment
[102] Voice Mail Port
[103] DTMF Integration
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[411]-[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[414]–[416] Outside (CO) Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch
[507] DISA Intercept Mode
• Related Feature References
Call Forwarding, Data Line Security, Direct Inward System Access (DISA),
Distinctive Dial Tones, Intercept Routing, Station Hunting
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Voice Mail Integration”
3-68
Features
3 Features
V-W
Volume Control
Allows a proprietary telephone user to adjust the following volumes, as necessary, by adjusting the corresponding levers or pressing the corresponding buttons.
• Handset receiver volume
• Headset volume
• Ringer volume
• Speaker volume
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Volume Control — Handset Receiver/Headset /
Ringer/Speaker”
Walking COS
Allows an extension user who is not at their own telephone to override the toll restriction
COS number of another extension by dialing their extension password. For the duration of the call, the COS of the extension is changed to the COS of their own extension.
!
!
• If the extension overriding toll restriction is assigned to “Forced” or “Verify–All”, the user must enter the account code before the line access code.
• When a user makes a call using this feature, the user’s extension number will be displayed on the SMDR, not the extension where the user made the call.
☞
• Operating Instructions References
1.7 Useful Features, “Calling Using Your Privileges at Another Extension
(Walking COS)”
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Extension Password Set (Manager only)”
Features
3-69
3-70
Features
Section 4
System Programming
4.1
Before System Programming
NOTE:
System data clear should be performed before System Programming.
(☞ 2.22, Starting the System for the First Time)
Default Setting
This system has factory default settings (☞ 5.1, Default Values). If any of the programming needs to be changed, you can change the setting by System Programming. Default shows you the factory default setting. Any required changes can be written in the Programming
Tables listed in section 7, Programming Tables.
Required Telephone Set
The following display telephone is required for System Programming.
• KX-T7330
Connect the telephone to the following.
• Jack number 01
Before entering the programming mode
Before entering the programming mode, confirm that:
• Your telephone is on-hook.
• No calls are on hold at your telephone.
Placing the Overlay on a Telephone
A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory. This overlay should be used at all times during programming. The functions of the telephone keys change during programming as shown below.
Location of Controls with the Overlay
SECRET SELECT STORE
PROGRAM PAUSE FLASH
|,
CLEAR
1
GHI
4
PQRS
7
PREV
ABC
2
JKL
5
TUV
8
0
END
DEF
3
MNO
6
WXYZ
9
NEXT
KX-T7330
4-2
System Programming
4.1
Before System Programming
To enter the programming mode
PROGRAM
Press the PROGRAM button.
#
Press #.
system password
Enter the system password.
(default : 1234)
!
!
• The system password can be changed by program [002] “System Password”.
• During the programming mode, your extension is treated as a busy extension.
• If you enter the wrong system password, you will hear an alarm tone (3 beeps).
Try again.
Programming sequence
After entering the programming mode
X X X parameters
STORE
END
Enter the Program Address. Enter the parameters.
Press the
STORE button.
Press the END button.
After pressing the STORE button, you will hear one of the following tones.
Confirmation tone (1 beep):
This informs you that storing is completed. You can continue programming by entering the same or another program address.
(2 beeps):
This informs you that the same parameter has already been stored.
Alarm tone (3 beeps):
This informs you that the entry is invalid.
To exit the programming mode
PROGRAM
Press the PROGRAM button.
System Programming
4-3
4.1
Before System Programming
Programming example
The following programming instructions assume that you have already entered the programming mode.
Example: Program [404] “Outside (CO) Line Group Assignment”
Program address Program title
[404] Outside (CO) Line Group Assignment
Assigns a maximum 6 outside (CO) line groups. Each outside (CO) line must be assigned to an outside (CO) line group. For example, if there are multiple telephone service companies available, outside (CO) lines can be grouped by the company.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
Program description
4 0
4
NEXT outside line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
outside line group no.* 2
(1···6)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
☞
!
!
* 1
Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
* 2
Outside line (TRK) group number: 1 through 6
Default Outside (CO) line 1 through 6 – Outside (CO) line group 1 through 6
• Each outside (CO) line can only belong to one outside (CO) line group.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Outside Calling
Additional information
Provides the factory default setting. If you change the setting, write the programmed data in the programming table listed in section 7, Programming Tables.
Program sequence:
1. Enter program address “404”.
2. Press “NEXT”.
3. Enter the outside (CO) line number (1 through 6) or press to select all outside (CO) lines.
4. Enter the outside (CO) line group number (1 through 6).
5. Press “STORE”.
6. Press “END”.
To continue assigning another outside (CO) line number, press
“SELECT” instead of “END” and repeat from step 3.
You can also continue assigning by pressing “PREV” or
“NEXT” instead of “END”.
You can go to the previous or next outside (CO) line and repeat from step 4.
Additional Information
• When you press , for example in step 3 in program [404], if all outside (CO) lines have been assigned as outside (CO) line group 1, “CO : TRK GRP – 1” will be displayed. If each outside (CO) line has been assigned to a different outside (CO) line group,
“CO : Mixed” will be displayed.
• You can press the SELECT button repeatedly to select the desired parameter, if available.
• You can use the or button to move to the next/previous step, if available.
4-4
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[000]-[001]
[000] Date and Time Setting
Sets the current date and time.
0 0
SELECT
(Sun···Sat)
0
NEXT hour
(1···12)
year
(00···99)
minute
(00···59)
SELECT
(Jan.···Dec.)
day day
(1···31)
SELECT
(AM/PM)
STORE
END
Default
’98 Jan. 1 Thu 12:00 AM
!
!
• To return to the previous programming step, press .
• To correct a wrong entry for the year, day, hour or minute, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one in each step.
• After changing an entry, you can press the STORE button. You do not have to perform the rest of the steps.
• The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.
• The system supports years from 1998 to 2097.
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Date and Time Setting, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
[001] System Speed Dialing Entry
Assigns a maximum of 100 System Speed Dialing numbers. To delete a stored phone number, press the CLEAR and STORE buttons after entering the Speed Dialing number.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
0 0 1
NEXT speed dialing no.
(00···99)
phone no.
32 digits max.
(e.g. 0···9, )
SELECT
STORE
To continue
Default
Not stored.
!
!
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• A line access number (9 or 0, 81 through 86) should be included before the phone number.
END
System Programming
4-5
[001]-[002]
4.2
System Programming
• Up to 32 digits, consisting of “0 through 9”, “ ,”, “#”, “PAUSE”, “—”,
“FLASH/RECALL” and “ICM (Secret)”can be stored.
• If you are storing an account code assigned in [310] “Account Codes”, enter and the account code after a line access number.
• If you want to conceal all or part of a System Speed Dialing number on the display, enter
“[” and “]” (press the ICM button) before and after the part you want to conceal. Do not press the ICM button before and after a line access number (9 or 0, 81 through 86) or an account code. “[” and “]” are counted as one digit.
• Press or to scroll the display
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Secret Dialing, System Speed Dialing
[002] System Password
Assigns the password required for entering the System Programming mode. Also it is used to set an extension password.
0 0 2
NEXT password
4 digits
(0000···9999)
STORE END
Default
1234
!
!
☞
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Extension Password / System Password
4-6
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[003]-[004]
[003] DSS Console Port Assignment
Assigns a maximum of 2 jack numbers to connect the DSS console(s).
0 0 3
NEXT
DSS console no.
(1···2)
extension jack no.
STORE
(02···16)
To continue
END
NEXT
or
PREV
Default
All DSS consoles – Disable (Not stored)
!
!
☞
• Two DSS consoles cannot be assigned to the same jack number.
• Extension jack 01 is the manager extension. So please do not assign extension jack 01 as the DSS console jack.
• To not assign an extension jack number, press the CLEAR button in the extension jack number step.
• The extension jack number which has already been assigned as a paired telephone in program
[004] “Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console” is not available in this program.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
DSS Console
[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console
Assigns a jack number for an extension paired with the DSS console.
0 0 4
NEXT
DSS console no.
(1···2)
extension jack no.
STORE
(01···16)
To continue
END
NEXT
or
PREV
Default
Extension jack number paired with DSS console 1 – Disable (Not stored)
Extension jack number paired with DSS console 2 – Disable (Not stored)
!
!
☞
• A single line telephone (SLT) cannot be paired with the DSS console.
• To not assign an extension jack number, press the CLEAR button in the extension jack number step.
• The extension jack number which has already been assigned as a DSS console in program
[003] “DSS Console Port Assignment” is not available in this program.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
DSS Console
System Programming
4-7
[005]-[006]
4.2
System Programming
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button
Selects how an outside call is transferred to any extension using the DSS button.
With Transfer: Press the DSS button to transfer an outside call.
Without Transfer: Press the TRANSFER button then the DSS button to transfer an outside call.
0 0 5
NEXT SELECT STORE
(With Transfer/
Without Transfer)
END
Default
With Transfer
!
!
☞
• This program is effective for 2 kinds of DSS buttons. One is on the DSS console, and the other is flexible CO button on your proprietary telephone assigned as a DSS button.
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customizing the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button
1.9 DSS Console Features, “Initial Settings”, One-Touch Dialing Assignment
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode
Selects changing the day, night and lunch service manually or automatically. For manual changing, refer to the Operating Instructions. For automatic changing, set the next program [007] “Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time”.
0 0 6
NEXT SELECT
(Man/Auto)
STORE
Default
Manual
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service
END
4-8
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[007]
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time
Sets the starting time on a week day basis, when “Automatic” is selected in program [006]
“Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode”.
0 0
7
NEXT NEXT
or
PREV
(Sun···Sat)
* 1 or
SELECT
(Every day) (Day/Night/
Lunch-S/Lunch-E)
To go to another day of the week
To go to another mode hour
or
SELECT
* 2
(1···12)
minute
(00···59)
SELECT
(AM/PM)
STORE
<If you press the SELECT button>
END
* 1
To assign every day of the week to one selection, press the button.
* 2
If the SELECT button is pressed, the display will show the previous entry. If the previous setting was “None”, press the SELECT button to enter the starting time. If you do not need to change the time service, keep pressing the SELECT button until “None” is displayed. For example, if Monday’s day mode is set to “None”, the day mode will not be turned on Monday.
Default
Everyday – Day – 9:00 AM / Night – 5:00 PM /
Lunch-S (starting) – None / Lunch-E (ending) – None
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service
System Programming
4-9
[008]-[009]
4.2
System Programming
[008] Operator Assignment
Assigns an extension jack number for the operator.
0 0
NEXT
8 extension jack no.
(01···24)
STORE
Default
Jack-01
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Operator / Manager Extension, Operator Call
END
[009] Extension Number Assignment
Assigns an extension number (100 through 199) to each extension.
0 0
9
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue extension jack no.
(01···24)
extension no.
(100···199)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Default
Extension jacks 01 through 24 – 101 through 124
!
!
• A double entry is invalid. If the programmed extension number is the same as a previously stored one, 2 beeps will be heard when the STORE button is pressed.
When extension number 103 has already been assigned to jack number 03, to assign extension number 103 to the jack number 05, change the extension number of jack number 03 to another one (100 through 199). Then assign extension number 103 to jack number 05.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Intercom Calling
4-10
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[010]
[010] LCD Time Display Selection
Selects how the current time will be displayed on a proprietary telephone while idle.
Either 12 hour or 24 hour (military time) can be selected.
0 1 0
END
NEXT SELECT
(12/24 HOUR)
STORE
Display example:
When “12 HOUR” is selected: Jan 1 11:20PM
When “24 HOUR” is selected: 1 Jan 23:20
Default
12 HOUR
!
!
• Programs [000] “Date and Time Setting” and [007] “Time (Day/Night/ Lunch) Service
Start Time”, and the Timed Reminder feature are assigned using 12-hour time regardless of this program. The SMDR printout is also printed using 12-hour time.
System Programming
4-11
[011]
4.2
System Programming
[011] System Speed Dialing Name Setting
Assigns a name to each System Speed Dialing number. The name will be displayed when making a call by using the System Speed Dialing feature. It will also be used for the Caller
ID feature.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
0 1
1
NEXT speed dialing no.
(00···99)
name
16 characters max.
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
* Extension name:
Combination Table
6
7
8
9
0
Pressing SELECT
(Times)
Keys
1
4
5
2
3
#
6
7
8
9
0
4
5
2
3
0
1
#
”
$
G
J
M
P
T
W
1
Q
A
D
O
S
V
<
(
Y
:
I
L
C
F
5
!
n r u h k x
’
=
@ b e
4 z
H
K
N
R
U
X
,
-
&
B
E
3
Z m p t g j w
.
+
% a d
2 q o s v y l i c f
6
?
;
>
)
<Example>
— To enter “Mike;
1. Press 6 and then press the SELECT button once to enter “M”.
2. Press 4 and then press the SELECT button 6 times to enter “i”.
3. Press 5 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter “k”.
4. Press 3 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter “e”.
!
!
Default
All System Speed Dialing numbers – Not stored.
• To erase all letters, press the CLEAR button. To erase 1 letter, press .
• Each name has a maximum of 16 characters.
• Press to scroll the display to the right side.
4-12
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
System Speed Dialing
[011]
System Programming
4-13
[100]-[101]
4.2
System Programming
[100] Hunting Group Set
Enables or disables automatically locating an idle extension in the same extension group as the dialed extension, when the called extension is busy. If “Enable” is selected, assign the next program [101] “Hunting Type”. Extension groups are defined in program [600]
“Extension Group Assignment”.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 0 0
NEXT extension group no.*
(1···8/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
* Extension group number: 1 through 8 / (all extension groups)
END
Default
All extension groups – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Station Hunting
[101] Hunting Type
Assigns the hunting type, Terminate or Circular, to each extension group when a hunting group is enabled in program [100] “Hunting Group Set”.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 0 1
NEXT extension group no.*
(1···8/ )
SELECT
STORE
(Terminate/
Circular)
To continue
SELECT
* Extension group number: 1 through 8 / (all extension groups)
Default
All extension groups – Terminate
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Station Hunting
END
4-14
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[102]-[103]
[102] Voice Mail Port
Assigns the extension jack number(s) connected to a Voice Processing System (VPS). Only extension jacks 07, 08, 15 and 16 are available.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 0
2
NEXT extension jack no.*
(07,08,15,16/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension jack number: 07, 08, 15 and/or 16 / (All 4 extension jacks)
Default
All 4 extension jacks – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Voice Mail Integration
[103] DTMF Integration
Enables or disables the system to send codes (DTMF signals) to the extension(s) assigned as the Voice Mail Port in program [102] “Voice Mail Port”. These DTMF signals indicate the state of the call (busy, answered, ringing, disconnected, etc.) in addition to the normal call tones. They also enable the Voice Processing System (VPS) to immediately recognize the current state of the call and speed up the call handling.
!
!
1
0 3
NEXT
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
Default
Disable
• The table on next page describes the codes (DTMF signals), call state and conditions for the DTMF integration operation.
• This feature greatly improves the performance of the Panasonic KX-TVP series: Voice
Processing Systems which have been programmed for Inband Signaling. For more information about Inband Signaling, refer to your Voice Processing System manual.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Voice Mail Integration
4-15
System Programming
[103]
4.2
System Programming
DTMF signals
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#9
Call State
Ringback Tone
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
DND
Answer
Forwarded to
Voice Processing
System
(Ringing)
Forwarded to
Voice Mail
(Busy)
Forwarded to
Extension
Confirmation Tone
Disconnect
Conditions
When an extension a VPS has dialed is ringing.
When an extension a VPS has dialed is busy.
When a VPS dials an invalid extension number or when a VPS is accidentally connected to another Voice Mail Port.
When an extension a VPS has dialed sets the DND (Do Not
Disturb) feature.
When an extension which a VPS has dialed answers the call.
When a called extension is forwarded to a VPS, the call can be forwarded to another available VPS. In this way, the first VPS, typically an Auto-Attendant, can release the call to another
VPS and receive another incoming call.
When a called extension is forwarded to a VPS and no VPSs are available to receive the call.
When a called extension is forwarded to another, non-VPS extension.
When a VPS has successfully turned a message waiting lamp on or a message waiting lamp off.
When the calling party disconnects.
4-16
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[104]-[105]
[104] Hold Mode Selection
You can select how to hold a line and transfer a call to another extension with a single line telephone (SLT), Hold-1, Hold-2 or Hold-3. If the following occurs frequently with an SLT, select “Hold-2” or “Hold-3”.
• Nobody answers when a call is received.
• A busy tone is heard even though nobody is using the outside (CO) line.
If a call is not terminated after going on-hook, the above cases occur. To avoid these problems, select “Hold-2” or “Hold-3”. Every call will be terminated unless 20 is dialed after flashing the hookswitch in the Hold-2 and Hold-3 modes.
Hold-1: To hold a line or transfer a call, flash the hookswitch.
Hold-2: To hold a line, flash the hookswitch and dial 20. To transfer a call, flash the hookswitch.
Hold-3: To hold a line or transfer a call, flash the hookswitch and dial 20.
1 0 4
Default
Hold-1
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Hold
NEXT SELECT
(Hold-1/Hold-2
Hold-3)
STORE END
[105] Conference Tone
Enables or disables the confirmation tone before starting or ending a conference call established by the Conference feature or Executive Busy Override feature.
1 0 5
NEXT END SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
Default
Enable
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Conference (3-party), Conference (5-party), Executive Busy Override
System Programming
4-17
[106]-[108]
4.2
System Programming
[106] External Paging Access Tone
Enables or disables the confirmation tone before paging is sent over the external pager.
END
1 0
6
Default
Enable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Paging
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
[107] DTMF Receiver Check
Enables or disables the 6 DTMF receivers to check whether the DTMF receivers are activated normally or not. Refer to the Section 6 Troubleshooting, “While Operating” for further information on checking the DTMF receivers.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 0
7
NEXT
DTMF receiver no.*
(1··6)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE END
* DTMF receiver number: 1 and 2 (for checking extension jacks 01 through 08)/
3 and 4 (for checking extension jacks 09 through 16)/
5 and 6 (for checking extension jacks 17 through 24)
Default
All DTMF receivers – Enable
[108] Flash Mode for a Station Locked Extension
Enables or disables a station locked extension to send a flash signal during a conversation with an external party.
1 0
Default
8
Disable
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
4-18
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[109]-[110]
[109] CO Indicator Assignment
Enables or disables an extension which was assigned not to ring in programs [408]-[410]
“Flexible Ringing Assignment” to answer an incoming outside call. The CO button indicator will flash when an outside call is received. If enabled, an extension user can answer the call by pressing the flashing CO button. If disabled, the user cannot answer the call even if they press the CO button.
1 0 9
END NEXT SELECT STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
Default
Enable
!
!
• The extension must be a proprietary telephone with a CO button and indicator.
[110] Flash Key Mode
Assigns the sending of the flash signal mode, MODE 1 or MODE 2, when the
FLASH/RECALL button on a proprietary telephone is pressed.
MODE 1: The flash signal is sent during the programmed time in [418] “Flash Time”.
MODE 2: The flash signal is sent while the FLASH/RECALL button is pressed if the time the FLASH/RECALL button was pressed is more than the programmed time in [418]. This will be useful to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up. If the time the FLASH/RECALL button was pressed is less than the programmed time in [418], the flash signal will be sent during the programmed time.
1
1 0
NEXT SELECT
(MODE1/
MODE2)
STORE END
Default
MODE 1
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Flash/Recall
System Programming
4-19
[111]-[112]
4.2
System Programming
[111] Hold Music Selection
Selects the music source,
Internal, External or Tone, which an external party will hear
when an outside call is on hold.
External : Uses an external music source, such as a radio.
Internal : Uses the internal music source equipped with the system.
Tone : Uses the cyclic tone below equipped with the system.
1 s
1
Default
1 1
External
NEXT SELECT
(Internal/
External/Tone)
STORE
!
!
☞
• The music source can also be used for BGM.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Music on Hold / Background Music (BGM)
END
[112] DSS Console Indication Mode
Enables or disables the Busy Lamp Field (BLF) on the DSS button to indicate the status,
Forward (FWD) or Do Not Disturb (DND), of corresponding extensions.
1 1 2
NEXT STORE END SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
* Enable: FWD – Flashing slowly, DND – Flashing moderately
Disable: FWD – Off, DND – Off
Default
Enable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
DSS Console
4-20
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[113] Automatic Redial Repeat
Selects the number of times Automatic Redial is repeated.
1 1
3
Default
3 times
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Redial
NEXT SELECT
(0/3/10/
15 times)
STORE END
[114] Automatic Redial Interval Time
Selects the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts.
1 1
4
NEXT SELECT
(40/60 sec)
STORE
Default
60 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Redial
END
[113]-[114]
System Programming
4-21
[115]-[116]
4.2
System Programming
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection
Selects the extension ringing pattern when an intercom call received, either Single, Double or Triple.
1 s
Single:
Double:
Triple:
END
1
Default
1 5
Double
NEXT SELECT
(Single/Double/
Triple)
STORE
!
!
☞
• The length of the ring cycle for a single line telephone (SLT) is determined in program
[124] “SLT Ringing Mode Selection”.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Ringing Pattern Selection
[116] Conference Pattern Selection
Selects the maximum number of external parties which can attend a conference. The maximum number of conference parties is 5.
3-party C-0 E-3: No external parties can attend a 3-party conference.
3-party C-1 E-3: One external party can attend a 3-party conference.
3-party C-2 E-3: A maximum of 2 external parties can attend a 3-party conference.
5-party C-2 E-5: A maximum of 2 external parties can attend a 5-party conference.
1
Default
1 6
NEXT SELECT
(3-party C-0 E-3/
3-party C-1 E-3/
3-party C-2 E-3/
5-party C-2 E-5)
STORE
5-party C-2 E-5
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Conference (3-Party), Conference (5-Party)
END
4-22
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[117]-[119]
[117] Call Pickup Tone
Enables or disables the confirmation tone when the Call Pickup feature is activated.
1 1 7
Default
Enable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Pickup
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE END
[118] Pulse Restriction
Enables or disables sending pulse dialing to the Central Office during a conversation with an external party when “Pulse Mode” or “Call Block Mode” is selected in program [401] “Dial
Mode”.
1
1 8
NEXT STORE END SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
Default
Enable
[119] Redialing after Pulse to Tone Conversion
Enables or disables sending tone dialing to the Central Office when an extension user redials after changing the pulse mode into tone mode by pressing and #.
1
1 9
NEXT
Default
Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE END
System Programming
4-23
[120]-[122]
4.2
System Programming
[120] Bell Frequency
Selects the bell frequency sent to a single line telephone (SLT).
1
2 0
NEXT SELECT
(20/25 Hz)
STORE END
Default
25 Hz
[121] Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access Number Selection
Selects the Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access number ( 0 or 9).
1 2 1
NEXT STORE END SELECT
(Dial 0/
Dial 9)
Default
Dial 9
!
!
☞
• If you select “0”, the operator call will automatically be “9”. If you select “9”, the operator call will automatically be “0”.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access Number, Operator Call
[122] Automatic Rotation for Outside (CO) Line Access
Enables or disables the rotation of outside (CO) lines seized for “Automatic Outside (CO)
Line Access”.
1 2 2
END NEXT SELECT
(Enable
Disable)
STORE
Default
Disable (Does not rotate.)
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access Number
4-24
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[123]-[125]
[123] Break Ratio
Selects the pulse break rate, MODE1 or MODE 2, when a Pulse is sent to the Central Office during a conversation.
MODE 1: 66 %
MODE 2: 60 %
1 2 3
NEXT END SELECT
(MODE1/
MODE2)
STORE
Default
MODE 1
[124] SLT Ringing Mode Selection
Selects the length of the ring cycle for a single line telephone (SLT).
MODE 1: 5 second cycle
MODE 2: 3 second cycle
1
Default
2
4
NEXT SELECT
(MODE1/
MODE2)
STORE
MODE 2
END
[125] Toll Restriction Check for and #
Assigns whether the entered “ ” and “#” are checked by toll restriction or not. This assignment is required for certain Central Offices to prevent toll fraud. Some Central
Offices ignore the user-dialed “ ” and “#”. If your Central Office ignores these symbols, select “Disable”.
.
1 2
5
NEXT END SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
Default
Enable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Toll Restriction
System Programming
4-25
[126]-[127]
4.2
System Programming
[126] DSS Off-Hook Mode
Enables or disables making an intercom call just by pressing a DSS button on a DSS
Console. If enabled, going off-hook is not needed.
.
1 2 6
NEXT STORE END SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
Default
Enable
!
!
☞
• This assignment is also effective for a flexible CO button on a proprietary telephone assigned as a DSS button.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Intercom Calling
[127] Pickup Group Set
Enables or disables the ability of an extension to pickup a call ringing at another extension
(if it is in the same extension group) by just going off-hook. If enabled, the feature number
(40) is not needed to pickup the call.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 2 7
NEXT extension group no.*
(1···8/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
Default
All extension groups – Disable (the feature number (40) is required to pickup the call)
!
!
• To prevent other extensions in the same extension group from picking up outside calls by just going off-hook, select “Disable” in program [109] “CO Indicator Assignment”. Then even though “Enable” is selected in this program [127], outside calls cannot be picked up by others by just going off-hook.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Pickup
4-26
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[200]-[202]
[200]
Hold Recall Time
Assigns the length of the hold recall timer. Hold recall (a ring tone or an alarm tone) is heard when the timer expires. If hold recall is not required, select “Disable”.
2
Default
0 0
30 seconds
NEXT
SELECT
(30 sec/
1/1.5/2/3/4/5/6 min/
Disable)
STORE
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Call Park, Hold
END
[201] Transfer Recall Time
Assigns the length of the transfer recall timer. If a transferred call is not answered within the programmed time, the call will be returned to the original caller.
2 0 1
NEXT
Default
30 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Transfer – to Extension
SELECT
(15/30 sec/
1/2 min)
STORE
END
[202] Call Forwarding Start Time
Assigns time for the Call Forwarding – No Answer feature. If a call is not answered within the programmed time, the call will be forwarded to the destination.
2
Default
0 2
NEXT
SELECT
15 seconds delay
(5/10/15/20 sec delay)
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Forwarding
STORE
END
System Programming
4-27
[203]-[204]
4.2
System Programming
[203] Pickup Dial Delay Time
Assigns the length of time for the Pickup Dialing feature. If the telephone user lifts the handset, the programmed party is called automatically when the timer expires. This delay gives the user an opportunity to enter numbers before automatic dialing occurs.
2 0 3
NEXT
SELECT
(1/2/3/4 sec)
STORE
END
Default
3 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Pickup Dialing
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time
Assigns the start time of a conversation either immediately after an outside (CO) line is seized or after dialing. This corresponds to the length of the conversation displayed on the
LCD and printed on the printer (SMDR).
2 0 4
END
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(5/10/15/20/25/30/
35/40/45/50 sec after dialing/Instantly)
Default
10 seconds after dialing
!
!
☞
• If reverse signal detection is enabled in program [424] “Reverse (Polarity) Circuit
Assignment”, the system will automatically start the timer immediately after an external party answers a call.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Polarity Reverse Detection, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
4-28
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[205]-[206]
[205] Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Duration Time Limit
Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation between two external parties using the
Call Forwarding – to Outside (CO) Line, Call Transfer – to Outside (CO) Line, or the DISA feature. When the timer expires, the outside-to-outside line call is disconnected.
2 0 5
NEXT time
(1···32 min)
STORE
Default
10 minutes
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Limited Call Duration
END
[206] Dialing Start Time
Assigns the minimum length of the pause time the system waits before dialing after seizing an outside (CO) line.
2
Default
0 6
NEXT
SELECT
(0/250/500/750/
1000/1250/1500 ms)
STORE
0 millisecond
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Outside Calling
END
System Programming
4-29
[207]-[208]
4.2
System Programming
[207] Hookswitch Flash Timing Range Selection
Sets the hookswitch flash time range sent from an extension to the system.
MODE 1: 40 to 140 milliseconds.
MODE 2: 80 to 180 milliseconds.
MODE 3: 80 to 650 milliseconds.
MODE 4: 80 to 1000 milliseconds.
MODE 5: 200 to 1000 milliseconds.
2
Default
0
7
MODE 1
NEXT
SELECT
( MODE1/MODE2/
MODE3/MODE4/
MODE5)
STORE
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Hookswitch Flash
END
[208] Interdigit Time
Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits for an outgoing outside call.
2 0 8
NEXT
SELECT
(5/10/15/20 sec)
STORE
END
Default
10 seconds
!
!
• The interdigit timer applies until the toll restriction check is completed. When the timer expires, an outgoing outside call will be disconnected while dialing, if “Enable” was selected in program [211] “No Dial Disconnection”.
• For a single line telephone, an outgoing outside call will be released from a DTMF receiver when the interdigit timer expires.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Toll Restriction
4-30
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[210]-[211]
[210] DTMF Time
Assigns the minimum duration of a DTMF signal sent to an outside (CO) line which is set to the DTMF mode in program [401] “Dial Mode”.
MODE 1: 80 milliseconds
MODE 2: 160 milliseconds
2
Default
1 0
MODE 1
NEXT
SELECT
(MODE1/
MODE2)
STORE
END
[211] No Dial Disconnection
Enables or disables disconnecting an outside (CO) line if an extension user does not dial anything within 10 seconds after an outside (CO) line is seized.
END
2
Default
1
1
NEXT
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
Disable (Does not disconnect)
STORE
!
!
☞
• The interdigit timer assigned in program [208] “Interdigit Time” applies until the toll restriction check is completed. When the timer expires, an outgoing outside call will be disconnected while dialing, if “Enable” was selected in this program.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Toll Restriction
System Programming
4-31
[212]-[213]
4.2
System Programming
[212] Outside (CO) Line Duration Time Limit
Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation with an external party. This program is effective for the extension(s) which assigned “Enable” in program [613] “Outside (CO) Line
Duration Time Limit Selection”.
2 1 2
NEXT time
(1··32 minutes)
STORE
END
Default
10 minutes
!
!
• A beep sounds at 5-second intervals 15 seconds before the programmed time expires.
• This program is effective only for an outgoing outside call.
• When making a call after an outside (CO) line is seized and transferred to the enabled extension in program [613] by another extension, the timer starts after the call has been transferred.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Limited Call Duration
[213] Bell Off Detection
Sets the maximum time between detecting one bell signal and the next from the Central
Office. In case the next bell signal is not detected within the programmed time, the system recognizes the bell signal has stopped.
2
Default
1 3
NEXT
SELECT
(3/6/12 sec)
STORE
3 seconds
END
4-32
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[300]-[301]
[300] Carrier Excepted Code Assignment
Assigns up to 20 carrier excepted codes, for example, Per Call Block code (XXXX). The system disregards the assigned code, and toll restriction and ARS are applied to the numbers after the code.
3 0 0
NEXT code no.
(01···20)
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue code
10 digits max.
(0···9, ,#)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
!
!
Example:
Code no. 01: 1831
Dialing number: 1831 93 425 9477 disregarded applied to the toll restriction and ARS
Default
All codes – Not stored.
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
[301] Toll Restriction – System Speed Dialing Boundary Class
Assigns the toll restriction class for System Speed Dialing numbers. System Speed Dialing numbers can be assigned in program [001] “System Speed Dialing Entry”.
3 0 1
NEXT SELECT
(Class-1···5)*
* Boundary Class: 1 through 5
STORE
Default
Boundary Class -1
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing
END
System Programming
4-33
[302]-[305]
4.2
System Programming
[302]-[305] Toll Restriction – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes
Assigns up to 20 toll call numbers which are restricted to make an outside (CO) calls on a class of service (COS) basis for each program.
3 0
X
NEXT code no.
(01···20)
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue phone no.
11 digits
(0···9, ,#)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
X
– Program address selection number: 2 ([302] for Class 2) / 3 ([303] for Class 3)/
4 ([304] for Class 4) / 5 ([305] for Class 5)
Default
All codes – Not stored.
!
!
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).
• Each phone number should consist of 11 digits.
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Toll Restriction
4-34
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[306], [309]
[306] Toll Restriction – Exception Codes
Assigns up to 80 exception numbers which are allowed to make an outside (CO) calls on a class of service (COS) basis even when denied codes are programmed in [302]-[305] “Toll
Restriction – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes”.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 0 6
NEXT code no.
(01···80)
phone no.
11 digits
(0···9, ,#)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
Default
All codes – Not stored.
!
!
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).
• Each phone number should consist of 11 digits.
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Toll Restriction
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set
Assigns up to 5 emergency numbers, for example, a police station or fire station. Calls with these numbers are free from restrictions, for example, toll restriction, Account Code –
Forced/Verify mode or Electronic Station Lock.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 0 9
NEXT code no.
(1···5)
STORE emergency no.
11 digits max.
(0···9)
To continue
SELECT
Default
CODE-01=000, Other codes – Not stored.
!
!
☞
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Emergency Call, Toll Restriction
END
4-35
System Programming
[310]-[311]
4.2
System Programming
[310] Account Codes
Assigns up to 24 account codes which are compared with the code entered when
“Verify-All” or “Verify-Toll” is selected in program [605] “Account Code Entry Mode”.
If “Verify-All” is selected, an account code is required to make an outside call.
If “Verify-Toll” is selected, an account code is only required to override toll restriction.
3 1 0
NEXT code no.
(01···24)
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue account code
4 digits
(0···9)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Default
All codes – Not stored.
!
!
☞
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Account Code Entry, Toll Restriction Override by Account Codes
[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes
Assigns up to 40 automatic pause insertion codes which are checked with the outside outgoing call number. When one of the codes is the same as the call number, the pause time assigned in program [417] “Pause Time” is automatically inserted after the code. If a second dial tone is sent from your Central Office, it is convenient to assign the area code as the pause code.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 1 1
NEXT code no.
(01···40)
pause code
7 digits max.
(0···9, , #)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
Default
All codes – Not stored.
!
!
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
4-36
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[312] Toll Restriction – Station Lock Boundary Class
Assigns the Toll Restriction class for an extension which has set the Electronic Station
Lockout or Remote Station Lock Control.
3
1 2
NEXT SELECT
(Disable/
COS-2···5)*
STORE END
* Boundary COS: 2 through 5 / Disable (Disables all outside outgoing calls.)
Default
Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Toll Restriction – Station Lock Boundary Class
[312]
System Programming
4-37
[350]-[354]
4.2
System Programming
[350] ARS Selection
Enables or disables the ARS feature for each outside (CO) line.
3
5 0
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue outside line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
* Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
[351]-[354] Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)
Assigns up to 80 area codes for outside calls which are applied to the ARS feature for each route.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 5 X
(1···4)
NEXT code no.
(01···80)
area code
7 digits max.
(0···9, ,#)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
X
– Program address selection number: 1 ([351] for Route 1) / 2 ([352] for Route 2)/
3 ([353] for Route 3) / 4 ([354] for Route 4)
Default
All codes – Not stored.
!
!
☞
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
4-38
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[355]-[359]
[355]-[358] Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes
Assigns up to 80 area codes for outside calls which are not applied to the ARS feature for each route.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 5
X
(5···8)
NEXT code no.
(01···80)
area code
7 digits max.
(0···9, ,#)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
X
– Program address selection number: 5 ([355] for Route 1) / 6 ([356] for Route 2)/
7 ([357] for Route 3) / 8 ([358] for Route 4)
Default
All codes – Not stored.
!
!
☞
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
[359] 1st Carrier Selection Code
Assigns the first carrier access code. When the code is dialed, the first carrier is always selected even if the ARS feature is enabled.
3 5 9
NEXT
END
1st carrier access code
4 digits max.
(0···9)
STORE
Default
000
!
!
☞
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
System Programming
4-39
[360]-[361]
4.2
System Programming
[360] ARS Modification – Removed Digits
Determines how the dialed number applied to the ARS feature should be modified before sending to the outside (CO) line for each route. The digits are deleted from the beginning of the dialed number.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 6 0
NEXT route no.
(1···4)
removed digits
(0···9)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Default
All routes – 0 (No deletion)
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
[361] ARS Modification – Added Number
Determines how the dialed number applied to the ARS feature should be modified before sending to the outside (CO) line for each route. Numbers are added to the beginning of the dialed number. Numbers can be carrier codes, etc.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 6 1
NEXT route no.
(1···4)
added number
20 digits max.
(0···9, ,#)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Default
All routes – Not stored.
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Press to scroll the display to the right side.
• The assigned numbers will be added to the dialed number after deleting the digits programmed in [360] “ARS Modification — Removed Digits”.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
4-40
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[362]-[363]
[362] ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection
Selects the dial tone pattern, Disable (no tone), Tone1, Tone2 or Tone3, generated after seizing an ARS outside (CO) line. The ARS feature is enabled on an outside (CO) line basis in program [350] “ARS Selection”. The tone will stop after the first digit (except for an account code) is dialed.
1 s
Tone1:
Tone2:
Tone3:
3 6 2
NEXT SELECT
(Disable/Tone1/
Tone2/Tone3)
STORE
Default
Tone1
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
END
[363] ARS Interdigit Time
Assigns the interdigit timer (in seconds) used while the system is checking the dialed number for the ARS feature.
3 6 3
NEXT STORE END time
(1···20)
Default
5 sec
!
!
☞
• This assignment should be the same as the interdigit timer assigned in program [208]
“Interdigit Time”.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
System Programming
4-41
[400]-[401]
4.2
System Programming
[400]
Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment
Assigns which outside (CO) line(s) is connected to the system or not.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 0 0
NEXT outside line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
(Connect/
Not connect)
STORE
To continue
END
☞
SELECT
* Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – Connect
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Outside Calling
[401] Dial Mode
Selects the dialing mode, DTMF, Pulse or C. BLK (Call Blocking), for each outside (CO) line.
DTMF: The dialing signals from an extension, either Tone or Pulse, are converted to
Tone and transmitted to the Central Office. If the system is connected directly to the Central Office or installed behind a host PBX, which receives both Tone and
Pulse, select this mode.
Pulse :
The dialing signals from an extension, either Tone or Pulse, are converted to
Pulse and transmitted to the Central Office.
C. BLK: If your Central Office can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals but the user are
contracted for Pulse, select this mode. When dialing with a touch tone telephone, only Pulse signals are sent to the Central Office.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
☞
4 0 1
NEXT outside line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
STORE
( DTMF/Pulse/
C.BLK Mode)
To continue
SELECT
* Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – DTMF Mode
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion
END
4-42
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[402]-[403]
[402] Pulse Speed Selection
Selects a pulse rate for each outside (CO) line which sets “Pulse Mode” or “Call block
Mode” in program [401] “Dial Mode”. There are 2 pulse rates, Low Speed (10 pps) and
High Speed (20 pps).
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 0 2
NEXT outside line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
(Low/High
Speed)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – Low Speed
[403] Host PBX Access Codes
If the system is installed behind a host PBX, each outside (CO) line may require an access code to make an outside call. Up to 8 access codes can be stored for each outside line.
When the programmed codes are dialed, the pause time assigned in program [417] “Pause
Time” is automatically inserted, and toll restriction is applied after the code.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 0 3
NEXT outside line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
access code* 2
STORE
Up to 8 access codes
1 or 2 digits
To continue
(0···9)
SELECT
END
*
1
*
2
Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Example:
• Access codes 81, 82 on outside (CO) line number 1
4 0 3
NEXT
1 8 1
,
8 2
STORE END
!
!
☞
Default
All outside (CO) lines – Not stored
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Host PBX Access
4-43
System Programming
[404]
4.2
System Programming
[404] Outside (CO) Line Group Assignment
Assigns a maximum 6 outside (CO) line groups. Each outside (CO) line must be assigned to an outside (CO) line group. For example, if there are multiple telephone service companies available, outside (CO) lines can be grouped by company.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 0
4
NEXT outside line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
outside line group no.* 2
(1···6)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
* 1
* 2
Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Outside line (TRK) group number: 1 through 6
Default
Outside (CO) line 1 through 6 – Outside (CO) line group 1 through 6
!
!
☞
• Each outside (CO) line can only belong to one outside (CO) line group.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Outside Calling
4-44
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[405]-[407]
[405]-[407] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch
Determines which extension(s) can make an outside call in the day, night and/or lunch modes.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number or
4
X
(05···07)
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
outside line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
# extension jack no.* 2
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE END
To continue
Go to another jack number
To continue
Go to another line number
X
– Program address selection number: 05 ([405] for day) / 06 ([406] for night) /
07 ([407] for lunch)
*
1
Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
*
2 Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – all extension jacks – Enable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Outside Calling
System Programming
4-45
[408]-[410]
4.2
System Programming
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch
Determines which extension(s) will ring for incoming outside calls in the day, night and/or lunch modes.
NEXT
or
PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. line number or
4
X
(08···10)
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
outside line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
# extension jack no.*
2
SELECT
SELECT
STORE
END
(01···24/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
Go to another jack number
To continue
Go to another line number
X
– Program address selection number: 08 ([408] for day) / 09 ([409] for night) /
10 ([410] for lunch)
*
1 Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
*
2
Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – all extension jacks – Enable
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD),
Receiving Calls
4-46
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[411]-[413]
[411]-[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch
Assigns the ringing start time for extension(s) which were selected to ring in programs
[408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch” in the day, night and/or lunch modes.
NEXT
or
PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. line number or
4
X
(11···13)
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
outside line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
# extension jack no.*
2
SELECT
SELECT
STORE
END
(01···24/ )
(Immdtly/
5/10/15 sec)
To continue
Go to another jack number
To continue
Go to another line number
X
– Program address selection number: 11 ([411] for day) / 12 ([412] for night)/
13 ([413] for lunch)
*
1
Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
*
2 Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – all extension jacks – Immediately
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Receiving Calls
System Programming
4-47
[414]-[416]
4.2
System Programming
[414]-[416] Outside (CO) Line Mode —Day/Night/Lunch
Selects the mode of an incoming outside call on each outside (CO) line in the day, night and lunch modes. There are the following 5 modes.
Normal: An incoming outside call will be received at the extension(s) assigned in programs [408]–[410] “Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch”.
DIL: An incoming outside call will be received at the assigned extension in this program.
DISA1: An incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the DISA feature. A caller will hear a tone or an outgoing message.
DISA2: An incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the DISA feature. A caller might hear OGM 2; for various configurations please see Cases
2, 3 and 4 in Section 3, Features “Outgoing Message (OGM)”.
UCD: An incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the UCD feature.
< To select Normal,
DISA or UCD >
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4
X
(14···16)
NEXT outside line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
SELECT STORE
(Normal/DIL/
DISA1/DISA2/
UCD)
To continue
SELECT
END
< To select DIL >
NEXT
or
PREV To continue
4 X
(14···16)
NEXT outside line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
SELECT extension jack no.*
(Normal/DIL/
DISA1/DISA2/
UCD)
(01···24/ )
2
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
X
– Program address selection number: 14 ([414] for day) / 15 ([415] for night)/
16 ([416] for lunch)
*
1
Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
*
2 Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – Normal
4-48
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[414]-[417]
!
!
• You must select “DISA1”when the optional OGM/FAX Detection card is not installed and if you want to use the internal DISA.
• When you select “UCD”, assign program [520] “UCD Group” to determine which extension group is assigned to the UCD group.
• When you select “DISA1”, “DISA2” and/or “UCD”, assign program [502] “OGM Mode
Selection” to determine which OGM will be used.
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct In Line (DIL), Direct Inward System Access (DISA),
Outgoing Message (OGM), Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
[417] Pause Time
Assigns the length of the pause time. The programmed pause time is automatically inserted after a line access code, a host PBX access code programmed in [403] “Host PBX Access
Codes” or a pause code assigned in [311] “Automatic Pause Insertion Codes” or can be manually inserted by the user using the PAUSE button.
4
1 7
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue outside line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT STORE
(1.5/2.5/
3.5/4.5 sec)
To continue
SELECT
END
* Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – 1.5 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Host PBX Access
System Programming
4-49
[418]-[419]
4.2
System Programming
[418] Flash Time
Assigns the length of the flash time. If your system is installed behind a host PBX, External
Feature Access is necessary to obtain its services. To enable it, select the required flash signal sending time for an outside (CO) line.
4
1 8
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue outside line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
STORE
(80/100/160/
300/600/900/
1200 ms)
To continue
SELECT
END
* Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – 100 milliseconds
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
External Feature Access, Flash/Recall
[419] Automatic Designated Outside (CO) Line Access
Selects which outside (CO) line can be seized automatically when an extension user dials the
Automatic Line Access number (0 or 9) assigned in program [121] “Automatic Outside (CO)
Line Access Number Selection”.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4
1 9
NEXT
END outside line no.*
( 1···6/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
* Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – Enable
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access Number, Outside Calling
4-50
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[420]
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal
Assigns the required minimum duration of the Calling Party Control (CPC) signal from the
Central Office for incoming outside calls. If programmed, the system disconnects the line when the CPC signal is detected.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4
2 0
NEXT
END outside line no.*
(1···6/ )
X
(00, 06···75)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
* Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
X
– CPC signal detect time selection number: No. = selection number
Detect time (milliseconds)
No.
00
01 - 05
06
Detect time
Disable
Cannot use
62
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
07
08
09
10
19
20
21
22
70
78
86
94
102
110
118
126
134
142
150
158
166
174
182
190
No.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Detect time
198
206
214
222
230
238
246
254
262
270
278
286
294
302
310
318
326
334
342
53
54
55
56
49
50
51
52
57
58
59
60
45
46
47
48
No.
42
43
44
Detect time
350
358
366
374
382
390
398
406
414
422
430
438
446
454
462
470
478
486
494
72
73
74
75
68
69
70
71
64
65
66
67
No.
61
62
63
Detect time
502
510
518
526
534
542
550
558
566
574
582
590
598
606
614
Default
All outside (CO) lines – 350 milliseconds (No. 42)
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
System Programming
4-51
[421]-[422]
4.2
System Programming
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls
Enables or disables the CPC signal detection during an outgoing outside call. If disabled, the CPC signal detection is only activated during an incoming outside call or after call hold.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4
2 1
NEXT
END outside line no.*
SELECT
(1···6/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
* Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
[422] Disconnect Time
Determines the amount of time to send the disconnect signal from the system to the Central
Office or host PBX. The time you select must be longer than the requirements of your
Central Office or host PBX.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4
2 2
NEXT outside line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
(0.5/ 1.5/
4.0 sec)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
* Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – 1.5 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Flash/Recall
4-52
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[423]
[423] Outside (CO) Line Ringing Pattern Selection
Selects the incoming outside call ringing pattern, Single, Double or Triple, for each outside
(CO) line. This is useful for distinguishing private calls from business calls.
1 s
Single:
Double:
Triple:
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
END
4
2
3
NEXT outside line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
STORE
(Single/Double/
Triple)
To continue
SELECT
* Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – Double
!
!
• When selecting the ring pattern illustrated above, we recommend that other ring patterns of the system be considered. Namely, please consider the settings of
[115] “Extension Ringing Pattern Selection”, and
[706] “Doorphone Ringing / Tone Pattern Selection”.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Ringing Pattern Selection
System Programming
4-53
[424]
4.2
System Programming
[424] Reverse (Polarity) Circuit Assignment
Enables or disables detecting the reverse signal for each outside (CO) line’s polarity from the
Central Office when making a call. If enabled, the outside call duration can be determined.
4
2 4
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue outside line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
* Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Default
All outside (CO) lines – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Polarity Reverse Detection
4-54
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[500]
[500] DISA Incoming Dialing Mode Selection
Selects the destination of an incoming outside call via the DISA feature when you select
“DISA 1” or “DISA 2” in programs [414]-[416] “Outside (CO) Line Mode
–Day/Night/Lunch”, Without AA (auto attendant) or With AA . If you select “With AA”, assign the next program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto Attendant”.
Without AA: Available destinations are: extension numbers assigned in program
[009] “Extension Number Assignment”, line access numbers (0 or 9, 81 through 86) and the operator number (0 or 9).
With AA:
Available destinations are: numbers available in the “Without AA” mode, and numbers (0 through 9) assigned in program [501].
5 0 0
END NEXT SELECT
(Without AA/
With AA)
STORE
Default
Without AA
!
!
• For example: in the “With AA” mode, if a number is not dialed within the programmed time in [517] “DISA AA Wait Time” after dialing 1, the call is received at the DISA built-in auto attendant number 1.
• In the “With AA” mode, if 0 and/or 9 are not assigned in program [501], the system recognizes them as a line access number and/or operator number.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
System Programming
4-55
[501]
4.2
System Programming
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant
Assigns a maximum of 10 DISA built-in auto attendant numbers when “With AA” is selected in program [500] “DISA Incoming Dialing Mode Selection”. The extension numbers assigned in program [009] “Extension Number Assignment”, and the extension group numbers assigned in program [600] “Extension Group Assignment” can be assigned as a 1 digit number and used as DISA built-in auto attendant numbers.
5 0 1
NEXT
AA no.
(0···9)
SELECT
(Jack/GRP/
Not Stored)
extension jack no.
(01···24) or
extension group no.
(1···8)
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
STORE
END
Default
All auto attendant numbers – Not stored
!
!
☞
• If you would like to use a line access number and/or operator number in the “With AA” mode, do not assign auto attendant number(s) which correspond to a line access number and/or operator number (0 and/or 9).
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
4-56
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[502]
[502] OGM Mode Selection
Selects how the 2 outgoing messages (OGM1 and OGM2) are used, MODE1 through
MODE5.
Mode
1
OGM1
DISA1
OGM2
DISA1
2
3
4
5
DISA1
UCD
UCD
UCD
DISA2
UCD
UCD-
END
DISA1
Description
The system can receive 2 incoming calls via the DISA feature at the same time. This is useful when receiving many calls.
An example: DISA1 is used in the day mode and DISA2 is used in the night mode.
The system can hold up to 2 incoming calls via the UCD feature at the same time until any extension is available.
The system disconnects an incoming call via the UCD feature when the assigned waiting time in [521] “UCD Busy Waiting
Time” expires.
An example: UCD is used in the day mode and DISA1 is used in the night mode.
5 0 2
END
NEXT
SELECT
(MODE 1/
2/3/4/5)
STORE
Default
MODE1
!
!
• Programs [414]-[416] “Outside (CO) Line Mode – Day/Night/Lunch” are used to assign
“DISA1”, “DISA2” or “UCD” to each outside (CO) line according to this assignment.
UCD-END is used automatically when UCD is assigned in programs [414]-[416],
“Disconnect” is selected in program [523] “UCD Busy Mode”, and “MODE4” is selected in this program.
• If the optional OGM/FAX Detection card is not installed, this assignment should be
“MODE1”.
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Outgoing Message (OGM),
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
System Programming
4-57
[503]-[505]
4.2
System Programming
[503] FAX Connection *
1
Assigns one extension which can receive facsimile data when the system receives a FAX
(CNG) tone via the DISA feature.
STORE END
5
Default
0
3
NEXT extension jack no.
(01···24)
Disable (Not assigned)
!
!
☞
• The assigned extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set.
• To not assign an extension jack number, press the CLEAR button in the extension jack number step.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Data Line Security, Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time
Sets the time from a call being received and answered with the DISA feature.
END
5 0
4
NEXT
SELECT
(0/3/6/12 sec)
STORE
Default
3 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM *
1
Assigns the length of time the system keeps detecting the DTMF signals or FAX (CNG) tone after the DISA outgoing message is completed.
5
Default
0
5
NEXT
SELECT
(0/5/10/15 sec)
STORE
5 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
END
4-58
System Programming
* 1 : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection
Card is installed.
4.2
System Programming
[506]-[507]
[506] DISA Busy Mode
Selects the operation when a called extension or all called extensions in an extension group enabled in program [100] “Hunting Group Set” via the DISA feature is/are busy.
Disconnect, Call Waiting or DISA2 is available.
Disconnect: The call is disconnected after the busy tone.
Call Waiting: A call waiting tone is sent to the called extension or first called extension in the hunting group.
DISA2: OGM2 is sent to the caller and the system waits for another destination when the first destination is busy.
END
5
Default
0
6
NEXT
SELECT
(Disconnect/
Call Waiting/
DISA2)
STORE
Disconnect
!
!
☞
• Program [502] “OGM Mode Selection” should be “MODE2”, if “DISA2” was selected in this program.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Outgoing Message (OGM)
[507] DISA Intercept Mode
Selects the operation when a called extension or extension group via the DISA feature does not answer a call within the length of time programmed in [508] “DISA Ringing Time before Intercept”. Intercept or Disconnect is available.
Intercept: The call is redirected depending on [408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing
Assignment–Day/Night/Lunch” (Intercept Routing – No Answer feature).
This is useful for business use. For example, the call is forwarded to the operator or a Voice Processing System automatically.
Disconnect: The call is disconnected. This is useful for users who do not want to forward the call, for example, to a home.
5 0
END
Default
7
Intercept
NEXT
SELECT
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
STORE
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Intercept Routing, Voice Mail Integration
System Programming
4-59
[508]-[509]
4.2
System Programming
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept
Assigns the length of time for the Intercept Routing – No Answer feature (
☞ [507] “DISA
Intercept Mode”, Intercept). When the time expires the system starts to redirect the call to the programmed extension(s).
5 0 8
END
NEXT
SELECT
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 sec)
STORE
Default
20 seconds
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Intercept Routing
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept
Assigns the length of time to call the extension(s) where a call is redirected by the Intercept
Routing – No Answer feature(☞ [507] “DISA Intercept Mode”, Intercept) after the time programmed in [508] “DISA Ringing Time before Intercept” expires. If the call is not answered within the programmed time, the call will be disconnected.
5 0
9
END
NEXT SELECT
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 sec)
STORE
Default
20 seconds
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Intercept Routing
4-60
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[510]-[511]
[510] DISA No Dial Mode
Selects the operation when the system does not receive either DTMF signals or a FAX
(CNG) tone after a programmed length of time. If the optional card is installed, then use program [505] “DISA Waiting Time after OGM”. If the optional card is not installed, then use program [515] “Intercept Time for Internal DISA”. Intercept or Disconnect is available.
Intercept: The call is directed depending on programs [408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing
Assignment–Day/Night/Lunch” (Intercept Routing – No Answer feature).
The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in
[509] “DISA Ringing Time after Intercept”.
Disconnect: The call is disconnected.
5 1 0
END
NEXT
(DISA1/
DISA2)
SELECT
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
STORE
To continue
NEXT
Default
DISA 1 and DISA 2 – Intercept
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Intercept Routing
[511] DISA Security Type
Selects the security mode for making calls attempted by a DISA caller. Trunk Security
(outside (CO) line security), All Security or None Security is available.
Trunk Security: Requires the caller to enter a DISA security code assigned in program
[512] “DISA Security Codes” before making an outside call.
All Security: Requires the caller to enter a DISA security code before making either an outside or intercom call.
None Security: Allows the caller to make both an outside and intercom call without entering a DISA security code.
5 1 1
NEXT
SELECT
(Trunk/All/
None Security)
STORE
Default
Trunk Security
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
END
System Programming
4-61
[512]-[513]
4.2
System Programming
[512] DISA Security Codes
Assigns a maximum of 4 required DISA security codes if “Trunk Security” or “All Security” is selected in program [511] “DISA Security Type”.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
2
NEXT
END
5 1 code no.
(1···4)
security code
4 digits
(0···9)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
Default
All DISA security codes – Not stored
!
!
☞
• The used security code numbers (not security codes) are printed on the SMDR.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
[513] Cyclic Tone Detection*
1
Assigns the number of times a cyclic tone is detected while the DISA outgoing message is sent so that the system can recognize the end of the DISA call.
5 1 3
NEXT SELECT
(Disable*/
2/3/4 Times)
STORE
* Disable (Does not detect)
END
Default
4 Times
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
4-62
System Programming
* 1 : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection
Card is installed.
4.2
System Programming
[514]-[515]
[514] FAX Tone Detection*
1
Sets the number of times the FAX (CNG) tone must be detected while the DISA outgoing message is sent before the system recognizes the incoming signal as facsimile data.
5 1 4
END
NEXT
SELECT
(1 Time/2 Times)
STORE
Default
1 Time
!
!
☞
• The extension which can receive facsimile data must be assigned in program [503] “FAX
Connection”
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA
Assigns the length of time the system keeps detecting DTMF signals after a call is received at the internal DISA. If the system does not receive DTMF signals within the programmed time, the call will be intercepted or disconnected according to program [510] “DISA No Dial
Mode”.
5 1 5
END
NEXT SELECT
(3/6/9 sec)
STORE
Default
3 seconds
!
!
☞
• A cyclic tone and FAX (CNG) tone cannot be detected by the internal DISA.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
* 1 : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection
Card is installed.
System Programming
4-63
[516]-[517]
4.2
System Programming
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment
Enables or disables each extension to receive an outside call via the DISA feature. If a
DISA call is received at a disabled extension, the DISA caller will hear a reorder tone and the call will be disconnected automatically. For example, it may be convenient to disable the president’s extension.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
5 1
6
NEXT extension jack no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
* Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
STORE
To continue
END
Default
All extension jacks – Enable
!
!
☞
• If a call via the DISA feature is received by an extension group, this program will not work for extensions in that extension group. In this case, disabled extensions will still ring.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
[517] DISA AA Wait Time
Selects the time that the system waits for a second digit entry. If the programmed time expires, the system will assume that the first digit is a DISA built-in auto attendant number, if a number is assigned in program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto Attendant”. For example, if a number is not dialed within the programmed time after dialing 1, the system will assume that
“1” is the auto attendant number.
5 1 7
NEXT
SELECT
(1/2/3/4/5 sec)
STORE
Default
2 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
END
4-64
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[518]-[519]
[518] DISA Tone Selection after the Security Code
Enables or disables sending a beep after entering the security code. If “Enable” is selected, a beep is sent when the number entered is the same as one of the security codes assigned in program [512] “DISA Security Codes”.
5 1
8
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
Default
Enable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
END
[519] DISA OGM Mute Time
Assigns the length of time from answering a call with the DISA feature and sending the
DISA outgoing message or a beep. During the assigned length of time, the system will not receive DTMF signals.
5 1
9
NEXT
SELECT
(0/2/4/6 sec)
STORE
Default
0 second
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
END
System Programming
4-65
[520]-[522]
4.2
System Programming
[520] UCD Group*
1
Assigns one extension group which works as the UCD group.
5 2
0
NEXT extension group no.
(1···8)
STORE
Default
Extension group number 1
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
END
[521] UCD Busy Waiting Time*
1
Assigns the length of time the system holds an incoming outside call via the UCD feature when all extensions in the UCD group are busy. When the programmed time expires, the call will be intercepted or disconnected according to program [523] “UCD Busy Mode”.
5
2 1
NEXT waiting time
(1···32 minutes)
STORE
Default
10 minutes
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
END
[522] UCD OGM Message Interval Time*
1
Assigns interval time between sending UCD outgoing messages to an incoming outside call via the UCD feature when all extensions in the UCD group are busy. The UCD outgoing message is repeated during the time programmed in [521] “UCD Busy Waiting Time”.
5 2 2
NEXT
SELECT
(30 sec/1/
1.5/2 min)
Default
1 minute
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
STORE END
4-66
System Programming
* 1 : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection
Card is installed.
4.2
System Programming
[523]-[524]
[523] UCD Busy Mode*
1
Selects the operation when the length of time programmed in [521] “UCD Busy Waiting
Time” expires. Intercept or Disconnect is available.
Intercept: The call will be redirected depending on programs [408]-[410] “Flexible
Ringing Assignment–Day/Night/Lunch” (Intercept Routing feature). The extension which receives a redirected call rings during the length of time programmed in [526] “UCD Ringing Time after Intercept”.
Disconnect: The call will be disconnected immediately.
5 2
3
NEXT SELECT
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
STORE END
Default
Intercept
!
!
☞
• This program is effective only when “MODE 3” or “MODE 5” is selected in program [502]
“OGM Mode Selection”. If “MODE 4” is selected, the call will be disconnected after the
UCD-END outgoing message.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Intercept Routing, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
[524] UCD Intercept Mode*
1
Selects the operation when all extensions in the UCD group do not answer an outside call via the UCD feature within the length of time programmed in [525] “UCD Ringing Time before Intercept”. Intercept or Disconnect is available.
Intercept: The call is redirected depending on programs [408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing
Assignment–Day/Night/Lunch” (Intercept Routing – No Answer feature).
Disconnect: The call is disconnected.
5 2
4
NEXT
SELECT
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
STORE
Default
Intercept
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Intercept Routing, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
END
* 1 : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection
Card is installed.
System Programming
4-67
[525]-[526]
4.2
System Programming
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept*
1
Assigns the length of time for the Intercept Routing – No Answer feature (☞ [524] “UCD
Intercept Mode”, Intercept). When the time expires, the system starts to redirect the call to the programmed extension(s).
5 2
5
NEXT SELECT
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 sec)
STORE
Default
20 seconds
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Intercept Routing, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
END
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept*
1
Assigns the length of time to call the extension(s) where a call is redirected by the Intercept
Routing – No Answer feature (☞ [524] “UCD Intercept Mode”, Intercept) after the time programmed in [525] “UCD Ringing Time before Intercept” expires.
5 2 6
NEXT
SELECT
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 sec)
STORE
Default
20 seconds
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Intercept Routing, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
END
4-68
System Programming
* 1 : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection
Card is installed.
4.2
System Programming
[600]-[603]
[600] Extension Group Assignment
Assigns an extension group for each extension. For example: by department or floor.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 0
NEXT extension jack no.*
1 extension group no.*
2
(01···24/ )
(1···8)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
*
1
*
2
Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
Extension group number: 1 through 8
Default
All extension jacks – Extension group 1
!
!
☞
• Every extension should belong to an extension group, but cannot belong to more than one group.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Extension Group, Station Hunting
[601]-[603] TRS – Class of Service Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch
Programs a class of service (COS) in the day, night and/or lunch modes for each extension.
There are 5 class of services available for each extension.
6 0 X
(1···3)
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue extension jack no.*
(01···24/ )
COS no.
(1···5 )
STORE
To continue
SELECT
X
– Program address selection number: 1 ([601] for day) / 2 ([602] for night)/
3 ([603] for lunch)
* Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
END
Default
All extension jacks – COS-1
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Toll Restriction
System Programming
4-69
[604]
4.2
System Programming
[604] Extension Name Setting
Assigns a name to each extension which will be displayed when making or receiving an intercom call.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 4
NEXT extension jack no.
extension name*
(01···24 )
10 characters max.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
* Extension name:
Combination Table
Pressing SELECT
(Times)
Keys
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W a d
2 q g j m p t w
.
+
%
B
E
3
Z
H
K
N
R
U
X
,
-
& # #
”
$
<Example>
— To enter “Mike”;
1. Press 6 and then press the SELECT button once to enter “M”.
2. Press 4 and then press the SELECT button 6 times to enter “i”.
3. Press 5 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter “k”.
4. Press 3 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter “e”.
b e
4 z h k n r u x
’
=
@
C
F
5
!
I
L
O
S
V
<
(
Y
:
END
l i o s v y c f
6
?
;
>
)
!
!
Default
All extension jacks – Not stored.
• To erase all letters, press the CLEAR button. To erase 1 letter, press .
• Each name has a maximum of 10 characters.
4-70
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[605]
[605] Account Code Entry Mode
Selects the account code input mode, Option, Forced, Verify–All or Verify–Toll, for each extension jack. This feature displays the account code of the called or calling party on the
SMDR.
Option:
Forced:
The user can enter any account code, if needed.
The user must always enter an account code. The code can be any number.
Verify–All: The user must always enter an assigned account code in program
[310] “Account Codes” to make an outside call.
Verify–Toll: The user can enter an assigned account code in program [310] to override toll restriction. The toll restriction COS numbers 3 through 5 will be changed temporarily to the COS number 2. (The COS numbers 1 and 2 will not be changed.)
6 0 5
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue extension jack no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT STORE
(Option/Forced/
Verify-All/Verify-Toll)
To continue
SELECT
END
* Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All extension jacks – Option
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Account Code Entry, Toll Restriction Override by Account Codes
System Programming
4-71
[606]-[607]
4.2
System Programming
[606] Call Transfer to an Outside (CO) Line
Enables or disables transferring an intercom or outside call to any outside (CO) line manually for each extension.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 6
NEXT extension jack no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All extension jacks – Disable
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Call Transfer – to Outside (CO) Line, Conference (3-party)
[607] Call Forwarding to an Outside (CO) Line
Enables or disables automatically forwarding an incoming intercom or outside call to any outside (CO) line for each extension.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0
7
NEXT extension jack no.*
SELECT
(01···24/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
* Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
STORE
To continue
END
Default
All extension jacks – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Forwarding
4-72
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[608]-[609]
[608] Executive Busy Override
Enables or disables using the Executive Busy Override feature at each extension. If enabled, an extension user can interrupt an established call.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 8
NEXT extension jack no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
* Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All extension jacks – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Executive Busy Override
END
[609] Do Not Disturb Override
Enables or disables using the Do Not Disturb Override feature at each extension. If enabled, an extension user can ring an extension which has set the Do Not Disturb feature.
6 0 9
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue extension jack no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All extension jacks – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Do Not Disturb (DND)
System Programming
4-73
[610]-[611]
4.2
System Programming
[610] Paralleled Telephone Connection
Enables or disables a single line telephone (SLT) to be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone.
6 1
0
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue extension jack no.*
(01···16/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension jack number: 01 through 16 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All extension jacks – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Paralleled Telephone Connection
[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine) Extension
Assigns the jack number of an extension connected to a telephone answering machine
(TAM) to activate the Call Retrieving from TAM feature.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1 1
NEXT extension jack no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
* Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All extension jacks – Disable (not connected)
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Pickup
END
4-74
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[612]-[613]
[612] Room Monitor Assignment
Enables or disables which extension(s) can be monitored using the Room Monitor feature.
6 1 2
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue extension jack no.*
SELECT
(01···16/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension jack number: 01 through 16 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All extension jacks – Disable (Cannot be monitored.)
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Room Monitor
[613] Outside (CO) Line Duration Time Limit Selection
Enables or disables the time limit programmed in [212] “Outside (CO) Line Duration Time
Limit” for each extension.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1 3
NEXT extension jack no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
* Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
STORE
To continue
END
Default
All extension jacks – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Limited Call Duration
System Programming
4-75
[614]
4.2
System Programming
[614] Internal Pulse Detection
Enables or disables connecting a single line telephone (SLT) to receive pulse signals for each extension.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1 4
NEXT extension jack no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
* Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All extension jacks – Enable
END
!
!
• If you select “MODE 1” in program [207] “Hookswitch Flash Timing Range Selection” and “Enable” in this program, the system will distinguish between a pulse signal and hooking depending on the situation. When you select “Disable” in this program, if “1” is dialed during the pulse mode, the system will regard it as hooking and all other numbers will be disregarded.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Hookswitch Flash
4-76
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[615]
[615] LCD Language Assignment
Selects the language, English, Spanish or Portuguese, shown on the LCD display of a proprietary telephone on an extension basis. The selected language is shown during operation and Proprietary Telephone Settings.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1 5
NEXT extension jack no.*
(01···16/ )
SELECT STORE
(English/Spanish/
Portuguese)
To continue
SELECT
END
* Extension jack number: 01 through 16 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All extension jacks – English
!
!
☞
• The language used for the SMDR printout is assigned in program [806] “SMDR Language
Assignment”.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Language Selection
System Programming
4-77
[700]-[702]
4.2
System Programming
[700]-[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch
Enables or disables receiving a call from up to 4 doorphones in the day, night and/or lunch modes for each extension.
NEXT
or
PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. doorphone number or
7 X
(00···02)
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
doorphone no.* 1
(1···4/ )
#
SELECT extension jack no.* 2
SELECT
(01···24/ )
To continue
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE END
Go to another jack number
To continue
Go to another doorphone number
X
– Program address selection number: 00 ([700] for day) / 01 ([701] for night) /
02 ([702] for lunch)
*
*
1
2
Doorphone number: 1 through 4 / (All doorphones)
Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All doorphones – all extension jacks – Enable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Doorphone Call
4-78
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[703]-[705]
[703]-[705] Door Opener Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch
Enables or disables accessing to up to 4 door openers in the day, night and/or lunch modes for each extension.
NEXT
or
PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. door opener number or
7 X
(03···05)
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
door opener no.* 1
(1···4/ )
#
SELECT extension jack no.* 2
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE END
To continue
Go to another jack number
To continue
Go to another door opener number
X
– Program address selection number: 03 ([703] for day) / 04 ([704] for night) /
05 ([705] for lunch)
* 1
* 2
Door opener number: 1 through 4 / (All door openers)
Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
Default
All door openers – all extension jacks – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Door Opener
System Programming
4-79
[706]-[707]
4.2
System Programming
[706] Doorphone Ringing / Tone Pattern Selection
Selects the doorphone ringing pattern, Single, Double, Triple or S-Double.
1 s
Single:
Double:
Triple:
S-Double:
NEXT
7 0 6 doorphone no.*
(1···4/ )
SELECT
(Single/Double/
Triple/S-Double)
STORE
To continue
END
NEXT
or
PREV
* Doorphone number: 1 through 4 / (All doorphones)
!
!
☞
Default
All doorphones – Triple
• When a doorphone call is received at a proprietary telephone, a tone is heard instead of ringing.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Doorphone Call, Ringing Pattern Selection
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection
Enables or disables sending a doorphone access tone to a monitored doorphone. If enabled, the access tone is heard from the doorphone when monitoring from a telephone starts.
7 0 7
NEXT doorphone no.*
(1···4/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
END
NEXT
or
PREV
* Doorphone number: 1 through 4 / (All doorphones)
Default
All doorphones – Enable
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Doorphone Call, Room Monitor
4-80
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[708]-[709]
[708] Doorphone Ringing Time
Sets the ringing time when making an intercom call from a doorphone.
7 0 8
NEXT doorphone no.*
(1···4/ )
SELECT
(15/30 sec)
STORE
To continue
END
NEXT
or
PREV
* Doorphone number: 1 through 4 / (All doorphones)
Default
All doorphones – 15 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Doorphone Call
[709] Door Opener Time
Assigns the length of the door opener time. The door is unlocked for the assigned period of time.
7 0 9
NEXT door opener no.*
(1···4/ )
SELECT
(1/2/3/4/5/
6/7/8 sec)
STORE
To continue
END
NEXT
or
PREV
* Door opener number: 1 through 4 / (All door openers)
Default
All door openers – 5 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Door Opener
System Programming
4-81
[800]
4.2
System Programming
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters
Assigns the communication parameters for the Serial Interface (RS-232C).
NL–Code:
(New line)
Selects the code for your printer or personal computer. If your printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select
“CR”. If not, select “CR+LF”.
Baud Rate: The baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the system to the printer or personal computer.
Word Length: The word length code indicates how many bits compose a character.
Parity: The parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character. Make your selection depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer.
Stop Bit: The stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character. Select a value depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer.
< Sets the new line code> < Sets the baud rate >
8 0 0
NEXT
SELECT
< Sets the word length >
STORE
NEXT SELECT
(CR+LF/CR)* 1
< Sets the parity >
STORE
(150/300/600/
1200/2400/
4800/9600 B)
< Sets the stop bit length >
NEXT SELECT
STORE
NEXT SELECT
(7/8 bits) (Mark/Space/
Even/Odd/
None* 2 )
STORE
NEXT SELECT
STORE
(1 bit/2 bits)
END
*
1
*
2
CR+LF (Carriage Return + Line Feed) / CR (Carriage Return)
Select “None” when the error checking function is not required from the printer.
Default New line Baud rate Word length Parity
CR + LF 9600 baud 8 bits Mark
Stop bit length
1 bit
!
!
• The following combinations are invalid.
Parity
Mark
Space
Space
Word length
8
8
8
Stop bit length
2
1
2
If any of the above invalid combinations are selected, an alarm tone is heard.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
4-82
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[801]-[802]
[801] SMDR Parameter
!
!
☞
Assigns the following 2 printing parameters to match the SMDR output with the paper size used in the printer.
Page Length: Sets the number of lines per page.
Skip Perf: Sets the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
(Perforation)
< Sets the page length >
8 0 1
NEXT page length
(4···99)
STORE
< Sets the skip perforation >
NEXT skip perforation
(0···95)
STORE
END
Default
Page length – 66 lines
Skip perforation – 0 line
<Example>
Standard paper for the SMDR
(11 inches)
• The page length should be at least 4 lines longer than the skip perforation length.
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
skip perforation
66 lines page length
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) machine perforation
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing
Determines which calls will produce an SMDR printout.
8 0 2
< Sets an outgoing call >
NEXT
SELECT
(On/Off/Toll)* 1
STORE
< Sets an incoming call >
NEXT SELECT
(On/Off)* 2
STORE
*
1
*
2
Outgoing: On (Print all calls) / Off (No printing) / Toll (Print toll calls only)
Incoming: On (Print all calls) / Off (No printing)
END
!
!
☞
Default
Outgoing calls / Incoming calls – On
• If “Outgoing; Toll” is selected, only calls which are checked in programs [302]–[305] “Toll
Restriction – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes” and are allowed, are printed out.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Programming
4-83
[803]-[804]
4.2
System Programming
[803] Secret Speed Dialing / One-Touch Dialing Printing
Selects to print or not print (on SMDR) secret dialing numbers stored in program [001]
“System Speed Dialing Entry” and/or stored in One-Touch Dialing even though they are not displayed on the LCD.
8 0
3
END
NEXT
SELECT
(No Printing/
Printing)
STORE
Default
No printing
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Secret Dialing, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
[804] System Data Dump
Starts and stops printing the assigned data. All or a specific area of current systemprogrammed data is printed out. The areas are as follows.
All Para: Prints out all data.
System Para: Prints out all data except for the following 4 parameters.
CO Para:
Ext Para:
Prints out programs [400] through [403] and [405] through [424].
If the extension is a proprietary telephone, programs [102], [516] [600] through [613] and [615] will be printed out. The assigned data on the PF
(Programmable Feature) buttons and CO buttons will also be printed out.
If the extension is a single line telephone, programs [102], [516] and [600] through [614] will be printed out. The assigned Personal Speed Dialing numbers are also printed out.
DSS Para: Prints out the assigned data in the DSS buttons and PF buttons on the DSS console.
Speed Dial: Prints out the System Speed Dialing numbers (00 through 99) assigned in program [001].
Stop Output : Stops printing.
< To select All parameters, System parameter,
Speed dial and/or Stop output. >
8 0 4
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial/
Stop Output)
To continue
END
4-84
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[804]-[805]
< To select the CO (outside line) parameter. >
8 0 4
NEXT SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial/
Stop Output)
< To select the Extension parameter. >
8 0 4
NEXT SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial/
Stop Output)
< To select the DSS parameter. >
8 0 4
NEXT SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial/
Stop Output)
outside line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
STORE
To continue extension jack no.* 2
(01···24/ )
STORE
To continue
END
END
DSS console no.* 3
(1···2/ )
STORE
To continue
END
*
1
*
2
Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
*
3 DSS console number: 1 through 2 / (Both DSS console numbers)
!
!
☞
• This program and [999] “System Data Clear” are not included.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection
Selects printing out the account code stored in program [310] “Account Codes”, or just the index of the account code on SMDR printout.
8 0 5
NEXT
STORE END SELECT
(CODE/
INDEX)
Default
CODE
!
!
• The printing of the index of the account code only occurs if the extension user entered their account code in the “Verify-All” or “Verify-Toll” input mode as programmed in [605]
“Account Code Entry Mode”.
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Account Code Entry, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Programming
4-85
[806], [998]
4.2
System Programming
[806] SMDR Language Assignment
Selects the language, English, Spanish or
Portuguese used for an SMDR printout.
END
8
Default
0 6
English
NEXT
SELECT
(English/Spanish/
Portuguese)
STORE
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Language Selection, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
[998] ROM Version
Confirms the system ROM version.
9 9 8
NEXT
END
Display example:
Y501E 980902 (AL)
Version Date
4-86
System Programming
4.2
System Programming
[999]
[999] System Data Clear
Resets all or a specific area of the current assigned data to the default settings. The areas are as follows.
All
Para
: Resets all data to the default settings.
System Para: Resets all data to the default settings except for the data of the following 4 parameters.
CO Para: Resets programs [400] through [403] and [405] through [424] to the default settings on an outside (CO) line basis.
Ext Para: Resets programs [102], [516] and [600] through [615] to the default settings on an extension basis.
DSS Para: Resets the assigned data on the DSS buttons and PF buttons on the DSS console.
Speed Dial : Resets the System Speed Dialing numbers (00 through 99) assigned in program [001].
< To select All, System parameter and/or Speed Dial. >
9 9 9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial)
To continue
END
< To select the CO (outside line) parameter. >
9 9 9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial)
outside line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
STORE
To continue
END
< To select the Extension parameter. >
9 9 9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial)
END extension jack no.* 2
(01···24/ )
STORE
To continue
!
!
☞
< To select the DSS parameter. >
9 9 9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial)
DSS console no.*
3
(1···2/ )
STORE
To continue
*
1
*
2
Outside (CO) line number: 1 through 6 / (All outside lines)
Extension jack number: 01 through 24 / (All extension jacks)
*
3 DSS console number: 1 through 2 / (Both DSS console numbers)
• This program and [804] “System Data Dump” are not included.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
System Data Default Set
System Programming
END
4-87
4-88
System Programming
Section 5
Appendix
5.1
Default Values
Address Program
[000] Date and Time Setting
[001] System Speed Dialing Entry
[002] System Password
[003] DSS Console Port Assignment
[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS
Console
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing
Mode
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time
[008] Operator Assignment
[009] Extension Number Assignment
[010] LCD Time Display Selection
[011] System Speed Dialing Name Setting
[100] Hunting Group Set
[101] Hunting Type
[102] Voice Mail Port
[103] DTMF Integration
[104] Hold Mode Selection
[105] Conference Tone
[106] External Paging Access Tone
[107] DTMF Receiver Check
[108] Flash Mode for a Station Locked Extension
[109] CO Indicator Assignment
[110] Flash Key Mode
[111] Hold Music Selection
[112] DSS Console Indication Mode
[113] Automatic Redial Repeat
[114] Automatic Redial Interval Time
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection
[116] Conference Pattern Selection
Default
’98 Jan. 1 Thu 12:00 AM
All speed dialing numbers – Not stored
1234
All DSS Consoles – Disable
DSS1 – Disable, DSS2 – Disable
With Transfer
Manual
Every day of the week
— Day – 9:00 AM / Night – 5:00 PM /
Lunch-S – None / Lunch-E – None
Jack-01
Jack 01 through 24 = Extn. 101 through 124
12 HOUR
All System Speed Dialing numbers – Not stored
All extension groups – Disable
All extension groups – Terminate
All 4 extension jacks – Disable
Disable
Hold-1
Enable
Enable
All DTMF receivers – Enable
Disable
Enable
MODE 1
External
Enable
3 times
60 seconds
Double
5-party C-2 E-5
5-2
Appendix
5.1
Default Values
Address Program Default
[117] Call Pickup Tone
[118] Pulse Restriction
[119] Redialing after Pulse to Tone Conversion
[120] Bell Frequency
[121] Automatic Outside (CO) Line Access
Number Selection
[122] Automatic Rotation for Outside (CO) Line
Access
[123] Break Ratio
Enable
Enable
Disable
25 Hz
Dial 9
Disable
[124] SLT Ringing Mode Selection
[125] Toll Restriction Check for and #
[126] DSS Off-Hook Mode
[127] Pickup Group Set
[200] Hold Recall Time
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[202] Call Forwarding Start Time
[203] Pickup Dial Delay Time
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time
[205] Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line
Duration Time Limit
MODE 1
MODE 2
Enable
Enable
All extension groups – Disable
30 seconds
30 seconds
15 seconds delay
3 seconds
10 seconds after dialing
10 minutes
[206] Dialing Start Time
[207] Hookswitch Flash Timing Range Selection
[208] Interdigit Time
[210] DTMF Time
[211] No Dial Disconnection
0 millisecond
MODE 1
10 seconds
MODE 1
Disable
[212] Outside (CO) Line Duration Time Limit
[213] Bell Off Detection
[300] Carrier Excepted Code Assignment
[301] Toll Restriction — System Speed Dialing
Boundary Class
[302]–[305] Toll Restriction — Classes 2 through
5 Denied Codes
[306] Toll Restriction — Exception Codes
10 minutes
3 seconds
All codes – Not stored
Boundary Class-1
All codes – Not stored
All codes – Not stored
Appendix
5-3
5.1
Default Values
Address Program Default
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set
[310] Account Codes
[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes
[312] Toll Restriction — Station Lock Boundary
Class
[350] ARS Selection
[351]–[354] Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes
(Leading Digits)
[355]–[358] Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes
[359] 1st Carrier Selection Code
[360] ARS Modification — Removed Digits
[361] ARS Modification — Added Number
[362] ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection
[363] ARS Interdigit Time
[400] Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment
[401] Dial Mode
[402] Pulse Speed Selection
[403] Host PBX Access Codes
[404] Outside (CO) Line Group Assignment
CODE-01 = 000, Other codes = Not stored
All codes – Not stored
All codes – Not stored
Disable
All outside (CO) lines – Disable
All codes – Not stored
All codes – Not stored
000
All routes – 0 (No deletion)
All routes – Not stored
Tone 1
5 sec
All outside (CO) lines – Connect
All outside (CO) lines – DTMF Mode
All outside (CO) lines – Low Speed
All outside (CO) lines – Not stored
CO1 – TRK GRP-1; CO2 – TRK GRP-2;
CO3 – TRK GRP-3; CO4 – TRK GRP-4;
CO5 – TRK GRP-5; CO6 – TRK GRP-6;
[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
All outside (CO) lines – all extension jacks – Enable
— Day/Night/Lunch
[408]–[410]
[411]–[413]
Flexible Ringing Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
Delayed Ringing Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
[414]–[416] Outside (CO) Line Mode
— Day/Night/Lunch
All outside (CO) lines – all extension jacks – Enable
— Day/Night/Lunch
All outside (CO) lines – all extension jacks – Immdtly
— Day/Night/Lunch
All outside (CO) lines – Normal
— Day/Night/Lunch
All outside (CO) lines – 1.5 seconds [417] Pause Time
[418] Flash Time
[419] Automatic Designated Outside (CO) Line
Access
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal
All outside (CO) lines – 100 milliseconds
All outside (CO) lines – Enable
All outside (CO) lines – 42 (350 milliseconds)
5-4
Appendix
5.1
Default Values
Address Program Default
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls
[422] Disconnect Time
[423] Outside (CO) Line Ringing Pattern Selection
[424] Reverse (Polarity) Circuit Assignment
[500] DISA Incoming Dialing Mode Selection
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant
[502] OGM Mode Selection
[503] FAX Connection
[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time
[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM
[506] DISA Busy Mode
[507] DISA Intercept Mode
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept
[510] DISA No Dial Mode
[511] DISA Security Type
[512] DISA Security Codes
[513] Cyclic Tone Detection
[514] Fax Tone Detection
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment
[517] DISA AA Wait Time
[518] DISA Tone Selection after the Security Code
[519] DISA OGM Mute Time
[520] UCD Group
[521] UCD Busy Waiting Time
[522] UCD OGM Message Interval Time
[523] UCD Busy Mode
[524] UCD Intercept Mode
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept
All outside (CO) lines – Disable
All outside (CO) lines – 1.5 seconds
All outside (CO) lines – Double
All outside (CO) lines – Disable
Without AA
All numbers – Not Stored
MODE 1
Disable
3 seconds
5 seconds
Disconnect
Intercept
20 seconds
20 seconds
DISA1 and DISA2 – Intercept
Trunk Security
All DISA Security Codes – Not stored
4 Times
1 Time
3 seconds
All extension jacks – Enable
2 seconds
Enable
0 second
Group – 1
10 minutes
1 minute
Intercept
Intercept
20 seconds
20 seconds
Appendix
5-5
5.1
Default Values
Address Program Default
[600] Extension Group Assignment
[601]–[603] TRS – Class of Service Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
[604] Extension Name Setting
[605] Account Code Entry Mode
[606] Call Transfer to an Outside (CO) Line
[607] Call Forwarding to an Outside (CO) Line
[608] Executive Busy Override
[609] Do Not Disturb Override
[610] Paralleled Telephone Connection
[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine)
Extension
[612] Room Monitor Assignment
[613] Outside (CO) Line Duration Time Limit
Selection
[614] Internal Pulse Detection
[615] LCD Language Assignment
All extension jacks – EXT GRP-1
All extension jacks – COS-1 — Day/Night/Lunch
All extension jacks – Not stored
All extension jacks – Option
All extension jacks – Disable
All extension jacks – Disable
All extension jacks – Disable
All extension jacks – Disable
All extension jacks – Disable
All extension jacks – Disable
All extension jacks – Disable
All extension jacks – Disable
[700]–[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
[703]–[705] Door Opener Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
[706] Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection
[708] Doorphone Ringing Time
[709] Door Opener Time
All extension jacks – Enable
All extension jacks – English
All doorphones – all extension jacks – Enable
— Day/Night/Lunch
All door openers – all extension jacks – Disable
— Day/Night/Lunch
All doorphones – Triple
All doorphones – Enable
All doorphones – 15 seconds
All door openers – 5 seconds
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters New line code = CR+LF; Baud rate = 9600;
Word length = 8; Parity bit = Mark; Stop bit = 1
[801] SMDR Parameter
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for
Printing
[803] Secret Speed Dialing/One Touch Dialing
Printing
Page length – 66; Skip perforation – 0
Outgoing calls – On; Incoming calls – On
No printing
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection
[806] SMDR Language Assignment
CODE
English
5-6
Appendix
5.2
Specifications
System Capacity
Control Method
Switching
Power Supplies
Dialing
Intercom Paths
Connector
Extension Connection Cable
SMDR (Station Message Detail
Recording)
Outside (CO) Lines: 3 max. (6 max. with 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion
Card)
Extensions : 8 max. (24 max. with 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion
Card and 8 SLT Extension Expansion Card)
CPU: 16 bit CPU
Control ROM: 4 MB, Control RAM: 1 MB
Space Division CMOS Crosspoint Switch
Primary: 110 – 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz (1.0 – 0.5 A)
Secondary: Circuit Volt (+5V, +26V)
Dial Pulse (DP):10 pps, 20pps
Tone (DTMF) Dialing, DTMF–DP
4
Outside (CO) Lines : 2-pin Modular Connector (RJ11)
Extensions/Doorphone: 4-pin Modular Connector
Pager/Music Source : EIAJ RC-6701 A plug (two-conductor, ø 3.5 mm in diameter)
KX-T7300 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 pair wire (T, R, H, L)
Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 pair wire (T, R)
Interface : Serial Interface (RS-232C) (D-SUB, 9-pin)
Output Equipment: Printer
Detail Recording : Date, Time, Extension Number, Outside (CO) Line
Number, Dialed Number, Call Duration, Account
Code
Station Loop Limit KX-T7300 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 ohms
Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 ohms including set
Doorphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ohms
15,000 ohms Minimum Leakage Resistance
Maximum Number of Station
Instruments per Line
Ring Voltage
Central Office Loop Limit
Environmental Requirements
1 for a KX-T7300 series or single line telephone
2 for by parallel connection of a proprietary telephone and a single line telephone
80 Vrms at 25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load
1,600 ohms max.
0 – 40 ˚C / 32 – 104 ˚F, 10–90% relative humidity
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range 40 – 140 milliseconds
Appendix
5-7
5.2
Specifications
Lines, Cards, Station Equipment
Item
Service Units
Outside (CO) lines
Extension Jacks
Station Terminals
3-CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card
8 SLT Extension Expansion Card
OGM/FAX Detection Card
Doorphone/Door Opener Card
Doorphones
Door Openers
External Pager
External Music Source
DSS Consoles
System Data
Item
Operator
System Speed Dialing
One Touch Dialing
Personal Speed Dialing
Call Park areas
Absent Messages
Toll Restriction Classes
Extension Groups
Message Waitings
Max. Quantity
1
6
24
1
1
40
1
1
4
4
1
1
2
Max. Quantity
1
100
12 per extension
(Proprietary telephone)
10 per extension
10
6
5
8
8 per extension
5-8
Appendix
Section 6
Troubleshooting
6.1
While Installing
paging.
PROBLEM
Extension does not operate.
Improper reset operation.
Noise during external
Volume distortion from external music source.
Speed Dialing or One-
Touch Dialing does not function.
A proprietary telephone connected to extension jacks 01 through 08 or
09 through 16 does not operate, but a single line telephone operates.
PROBABLE CAUSE
Something is wrong with the printed circuit board
(Extension Card).
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Exchange the printed circuit board with another printed circuit board.
Something is wrong with the connection between the system and extension.
Take the extension and plug it into the same extension port using a short telephone cord. If the telephone works correctly, the connection between the system and the extension must be repaired.
A telephone with an A-A1 relay is connected.
Use a 2 wire cord.
Set the A-A1 relay switch on the telephone to the “OUT” or “OFF” position.
Something is wrong with the extension.
Take the extension and plug it into another extension port that is working. If the telephone does not work, replace the phone.
Turn the Power Switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
Induced noise on the wire between the system and the amplifier.
Use a shielded cable as the connection wire between the system and amplifier. A short shielded cable is recommended.
Excessive input level from external music source.
Decrease the output level of the external music source by using the volume control on the music source.
Wrong programming.
Enter an outside line access number (9 or 0, 81 through 86) in programming.
An extension (H, L) jack 01 through 08 or
09 through 16 may have been shorted.
Turn the Power Switch “OFF”.
Fix the shorted part, then turn the
Power Switch “ON”.
6-2
Troubleshooting
6.2
While Connecting
Can you dial an extension?
No
Connection between the system and a proprietary telephone:
CAUSE
T/R is connected to H/L.
H •
T •
R •
L •
KX-TA308
• H
• T
• R
• L
Extension
SOLUTION
Use the correct cord
(the inner 2 wires are for T/R and the outer 2 wires are for
H/L).
Connection between the system and a single line telephone:
CAUSE
T/R is connected to H/L.
SOLUTION
Use the correct cord
(the inner 2 wires are for
T/R).
H •
T •
R •
L •
KX-TA308
•
• T
•
• R
Extension
Yes
Can you dial out using an outside (CO) line?
Connection between the system and a single line telephone that is polaritysensitive:
CAUSE
“T” is connected to “R”.
Reverse the connections of
T/R.
SOLUTION
H •
T •
R •
L •
KX-TA308
•
• T
•
• R
Extension
No
Connection between the Central Office and the system:
CAUSE
Outside lines are connected to H/L.
SOLUTION
Reconnect the outside (CO) lines to T/R using 2-conductor wiring.
•
•
Outside line
•
• T
•
• R
KX-TA308
Troubleshooting
6-3
6.3
While Operating
PROBLEM
When using the speakerphone with a proprietary telephone
KX-T7330 nothing is heard.
The unit does not ring.
PROBABLE CAUSE
The HANDSET/HEADSET selector on the KX-T7330 is set to the “HEADSET” position.
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
When the headset is not used, set the
HANDSET/HEADSET selector to the
“HANDSET” position.
During a power failure, the extension connected to jack number 01 or 09 does not operate.
A proprietary telephone is connected to the jack.
Making an outside call cannot be performed.
The Ringer Volume
Selector is set to “OFF”.
The corresponding CO button does not exist on the proprietary telephone.
Set to “HIGH” or “LOW”.
Disconnect the proprietary telephone and connect a single line telephone.
Program the CO button. See the
Flexible Button Assignment.
(
☞ Operating Instructions,
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings,
“Customizing the Buttons on Your
Telephone”)
A tone type single line telephone (SLT) user cannot make a call.
There may be something wrong with a DTMF receiver.
1. Select “Enable” for DTMF receiver 1 and “Disable” for DTMF receiver 2 in program [107].
2. Make a call using a tone type SLT connected to one of extension jacks
01–08.
3. If you cannot make the call, the problem may have been caused by
DTMF receiver 1. If the call can be made, go to step 4.
4. Try DTMF receiver 2. Select
“Disable” for DTMF receiver 1 and
“Enable” for DTMF receiver 2 in program [107], and make another call.
If you cannot make the call, the problem may have been caused by
DTMF receiver 2. If the call can be made, go to step 5.
5. Check the other 4 DTMF receivers in the same way. Refer to program
[107].
6-4
Troubleshooting
Section 7
Programming Tables
7 Programming Tables
Default
Change
Year
(00 – 99)
’98
[000] Date and Time Setting
Month
(Jan. – Dec.)
Jan.
Day
(1 – 31)
1
Day of the week
(Sun – Sat)
Thu
Hour
(1 – 12)
12
Minute
(00 – 59)
00
AM / PM
AM
Default
[002] System Password
Parameter: 4 digits, 0 – 9
1 2 3 4
Selection
Default
DSS 1
DSS 2
[003]
DSS Console Port Assignment
DSS console jack no. (02…16) / Disable
All: Disable
[004]
Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console
Paired telephone jack no. (01…16) / Disable
DSS 1 – Disable / DSS 2 – Disable
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button
With Transfer
Without Transfer
Default
✓
Selection
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode
Manually
Automatically
Default
✓
Selection
Day
Night
Lunch-S
Lunch-E
Default
Every day
9:00 AM
5:00 PM
None
None
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time
Every day Sun.
Mon.
Tue.
Change
Wed.
Thu.
Fri.
Sat.
[008] Operator Assignment
Operator
Default
Jack-01
Jack no.
[010] LCD Time Display Selection
12 HOUR
24 HOUR
Default
✓
Selection
7-2
Programming Tables
7
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
09
10
11
12
05
06
07
08
SPD no.
Default
00
01
02
03
04
33
34
35
36
29
30
31
32
37
38
39
Programming Tables
[001] System Speed Dialing Entry
Telephone number (32 digits max.)
72
73
74
75
68
69
70
71
76
77
78
79
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
52
53
54
55
SPD no.
All: Not stored
40
41
42
43
48
49
50
51
44
45
46
47
Telephone number (32 digits max.)
Programming Tables
7-3
7 Programming Tables
84
85
86
87
88
89
(Continued)
SPD no.
80
81
82
83
Telephone no. (32 digits max.) SPD no.
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
Telephone no. (32 digits max.)
Extension jack no.
13
14
15
16
09
10
11
12
05
06
07
08
01
02
03
04
21
22
23
24
*
17
18
19
20
[009]
Extension Number Assignment
112
113
114
115
108
109
110
111
Default
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
120
121
122
123
124
116
117
118
119
Extension no.
(100…199)
Change
[600]
Extension Group Assignment
Extension group no. (1…8)
Default: All – Group 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[604]
Extension Name Setting
Extension name
(10 character max.)
Default: All – Not stored
7-4
Programming Tables
7
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
09
10
11
12
05
06
07
08
SPD no.
Default
00
01
02
03
04
33
34
35
36
29
30
31
32
37
38
39
Programming Tables
[011] System Speed Dialing Name Setting
Name (16 characters max.)
72
73
74
75
68
69
70
71
76
77
78
79
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
52
53
54
55
SPD no.
All: Not stored
40
41
42
43
48
49
50
51
44
45
46
47
Name (16 characters max.)
Programming Tables
7-5
7 Programming Tables
84
85
86
87
88
89
(Continued)
SPD no.
80
81
82
83
Name (16 characters max.) SPD no.
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
Name (16 characters max.)
Selection
Disable
Enable
Default
All
✓
[100] Hunting Group Set
Extension group no. (1…8,
*: all)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
*
Selection
Terminate
Circular
Default
All
✓
[101] Hunting Type
Extension group no. (1…8,
*: all)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
*
Selection
Disable
Enable
Default
All
✓
[102] Voice Mail Port
Extn. jack no. (07, 08, 15, 16,
*: all)
07 08 15 16
*
Default
All
✓
[107] DTMF Receiver Check
1
DTMF receiver no. (1…6)
2 3 4 5 6
Selection
Default
Change
[103]
DTMF Integration
Enable Disable
✓
Hold-1
✓
[104]
Hold Mode Selection
Hold-2 Hold-3
[105]
Conference Tone
Enable
✓
Disable
[106] External
Paging Access Tone
Enable
✓
Disable
7-6
Programming Tables
7 Programming Tables
Selection
Default
Change
[108] Flash Mode for a
Station Locked Extension
Enable Disable
✓
[109] CO Indicator
Enable
✓
Assignment
[110]
Flash Key Mode
Disable MODE 1
✓
MODE 2
[111]
Hold Music Selection
Internal External
✓
Tone
Selection
Default
Change
[112] DSS Console
Indication Mode
Enable
✓
Disable
[113] Automatic Redial Repeat
0 time 3 times
✓
10 times 15 times
[114] Automatic Redial
Interval Time
40 sec 60 sec
✓
Selection
Default
Change
[115] Extension Ringing
Pattern Selection
Single Double
✓
Triple
3-Party
C-0 E-3
[116]
Conference Pattern Selection
3-Party
C-1 E-3
3-Party
C-2 E-3
5-Party
C-2 E-5
✓
Selection
Default
Change
[117] Call
Pickup Tone
Enable
✓
Disable
[118]
Pulse Restriction
Enable
✓
Disable
[119] Redialing after
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Enable Disable
✓
[120]
Bell Frequency
20 Hz 25 Hz
✓
Selection
Default
Change
[121] Automatic Outside (CO) Line
Access Number Selection
Dial 0 Dial 9
✓
[122] Automatic Rotation for Outside (CO) Line Access
Enable Disable
✓
Programming Tables
7-7
7 Programming Tables
Selection
Default
Change
MODE 1
✓
[123]
Break Ratio
MODE 2
[124] SLT Ringing
Mode Selection
MODE 1 MODE 2
✓
[125] Toll Restriction
Check for and #
Enable
✓
Disable
[126] DSS
Off-Hook Mode
Enable
✓
Disable
Selection
Disable
Enable
Default
All
✓
[127] Pickup Group Set
Extension group no. (1…8, : all)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Selection
Default
Change
30 sec
✓
1 min
[200] Hold Recall Time
1.5 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min Disable
Selection
Default
Change
[201]
Transfer Recall Time
15 sec 30 sec
✓
1 min 2 min
Call Forwarding Start Time
5 sec
[202]
10 sec 15 sec
✓
20 sec
[203]
Pickup Dial Delay Time
1 sec 2 sec 3 sec
✓
4 sec
Selection
Default
Change
5 sec 10 sec
✓
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time
15 sec 20 sec 25 sec 30 sec 35 sec 40 sec 45 sec 50 sec Instantly
7-8
Programming Tables
7 Programming Tables
Selection
Default
Change
[205] Outside to Outside (CO to
CO) Line Duration Time Limit
1…32 minutes
10 minutes
0 ms
✓
[206]
Dialing Start Time
250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms 1250 ms 1500 ms
Selection
Default
Change
MODE 1
✓
[207]
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range Selection
MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5 5 sec
[208]
Interdigit Time
10 sec
✓
15 sec 20 sec
Selection
Default
Change
[210]
DTMF Time
MODE 1
✓
MODE 2
[211] No Dial
Disconnection
Enable Disable
✓
[212] Outside (CO) Line
Duration Time Limit
1…32 minutes
10 minutes
3 sec
✓
[213]
Bell Off Detection
6 sec 12 sec
CODE no.
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
[300] Carrier Excepted Code Assignment
Carrier code (10 digits max.) CODE no.
Not stored
15
16
17
18
19
20
11
12
13
14
Carrier code (10 digits max.)
[301] Toll Restriction — System Speed Dialing Boundary Class
Selection
Default
Change
Class-1
✓
Class-2 Class-3 Class-4 Class-5
Programming Tables
7-9
7 Programming Tables
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
CODE no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
[302] Toll Restriction –
Class 2 Denied Codes
[303] Toll Restriction –
Class 3 Denied Codes
[304] Toll Restriction –
Class 4 Denied Codes
Telephone no. (11 digits)
All: Not stored
[305] Toll Restriction –
Class 5 Denied Codes
7-10
Programming Tables
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
CODE no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[306] Toll Restriction – Exception Codes
Telephone no. (11 digits)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
CODE no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Telephone no. (11 digits)
Programming Tables
7-11
10
11
12
06
07
08
09
CODE no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
7 Programming Tables
CODE no.
Default
1
2
3
4
5
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set
Emergency no. (11 digits max.)
CODE-01 = 000, Other codes = Not stored
Account code (4 digits)
[310] Account Codes
CODE no.
All: Not stored
13
14
15
16
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
Account code (4 digits)
7-12
Programming Tables
7
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
CODE no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
Programming Tables
[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes
Pause code (7 digits max.) CODE no.
All: Not stored
37
38
39
40
33
34
35
36
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
Pause code (7 digits max.)
[312] Toll Restriction – Station Lock Boundary Class
Default
✓
Change
Disable
COS-2
COS-3
COS-4
COS-5
Selection
Enable
Disable
Default
All
[350] ARS Selection
1
Outside line no. (1…6, : All)
2 3 4 5 6
✓
Programming Tables
7-13
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[351] Route 1 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)
Area code no. (7 digits max.) Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
7-14
Programming Tables
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[352] Route 2 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)
Area code no. (7 digits max.) Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Programming Tables
7-15
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[353] Route 3 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)
Area code no. (7 digits max.) Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
7-16
Programming Tables
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[354] Route 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)
Area code no. (7 digits max.) Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Programming Tables
7-17
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[355] Route 1 Exception Codes
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
7-18
Programming Tables
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[356] Route 2 Exception Codes
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
Programming Tables
7-19
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[357] Route 3 Exception Codes
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
7-20
Programming Tables
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[358] Route 4 Exception Codes
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
Programming Tables
7-21
7 Programming Tables
Selection
Default
Change
[359] 1st Carrier Selection Code
1st carrier access code (4 digits max.)
000
Route no.
Default
1
2
3
4
[360] ARS Modification –
Removed Digits
Deleted digits
(0…9)
All routes – 0
[361]
ARS Modification – Added Number
Added no. : 20 digits max.
(0…9, , #)
All routes – Not stored
Selection
Default
Change
[362]
ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection
Disable Tone 1
✓
Tone 2 Tone 3
[363]
ARS Interdigit Time
1…20 seconds
5 seconds
Outside line no.
Default: All
1
2
3
6
*
4
5
[400] Outside (CO) Line
Connection Assignment
Connect
✓
Selection
No Connect DTMF
✓
[401] Dial Mode
Selection
Pulse Call Blocking
[402] Pulse
Speed Selection
Low Speed
✓
Selection
High Speed
7-22
Programming Tables
7 Programming Tables
Outside line no.
Default
1
2
3
6
*
4
5
[403] Host PBX Access Codes
Access codes
(1 or 2 digits, 8 different codes max.)
All: Not stored
[404] Outside (CO)
Line Group Assignment
Outside line group no.
(1…6)
Change Default
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
[405] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment — Day
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
Outside line 1 Outside line 2 Outside line 3 Outside line 4 Outside line 5 Outside line 6
* (All)
Selection
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable
✓
Enable Disable Enable Disable
✓ ✓
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable
Programming Tables
7-23
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
[406] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment — Night
Outside line 1 Outside line 2 Outside line 3 Outside line 4 Outside line 5 Outside line 6
* (All)
Selection
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable
✓
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable
7-24
Programming Tables
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
[407] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment — Lunch
Outside line 1 Outside line 2 Outside line 3 Outside line 4 Outside line 5 Outside line 6
* (All)
Selection
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable
✓
Enable Disable Enable Disable
✓ ✓
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable
Programming Tables
7-25
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
[408] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day
Outside line 1 Outside line 2 Outside line 3 Outside line 4 Outside line 5 Outside line 6
* (All)
Selection
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable
✓
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable
7-26
Programming Tables
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
[409] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Night
Outside line 1 Outside line 2 Outside line 3 Outside line 4 Outside line 5 Outside line 6
* (All)
Selection
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable
✓
Enable Disable Enable Disable
✓ ✓
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable
Programming Tables
7-27
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Lunch
Outside line 1 Outside line 2 Outside line 3 Outside line 4 Outside line 5 Outside line 6
* (All)
Selection
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable
✓
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable
7-28
Programming Tables
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
[411] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day
Outside line 1
I
✓
Outside line 2 Outside line 3 Outside line 4 Outside line 5 Outside line 6
* (All)
Selection (I: Immediately, 5: 5 seconds delay, 10: 10 seconds delay, 15: 15 seconds delay)
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15
Programming Tables
7-29
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
[412] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Night
Outside line 1
I
✓
Outside line 2 Outside line 3 Outside line 4 Outside line 5 Outside line 6
* (All)
Selection (I: Immediately, 5: 5 seconds delay, 10: 10 seconds delay, 15: 15 seconds delay)
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15
7-30
Programming Tables
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Lunch
Outside line 1
I
✓
Outside line 2 Outside line 3 Outside line 4 Outside line 5 Outside line 6
* (All)
Selection (I: Immediately, 5: 5 seconds delay, 10: 10 seconds delay, 15: 15 seconds delay)
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15 I
✓
5 10 15
Programming Tables
7-31
7 Programming Tables
Outside line no.
Default: All
1
2
3
4
5
6
*
[414] Outside (CO) Line Mode
— Day
N
✓
[415] Outside (CO) Line Mode
— Night
[416] Outside (CO) Line Mode
— Lunch
Selection — N: Normal, DIL + Extension jack no. (01…24), D1: DISA1, D2: DISA2, U: UCD
DIL Extn. no. D1 D2 U N
✓
DIL Extn. no. D1 D2 U N
✓
DIL Extn. no. D1 D2 U
Outside line no.
Default: All
1
2
3
6
*
4
5
[417]
Pause Time
1.5
✓
Selection (seconds)
2.5
3.5
4.5
80 100
✓
[418]
Flash Time
Selection (milliseconds)
160 300 600 900 1200
Outside line no.
Default: All
1
2
3
6
*
4
5
[419] Automatic Designated
Outside (CO) Line Access
Enable
✓
Selection
Disable
[420] Calling Party
Control (CPC) Signal
Selection: 00 (Disable),
06 (62 msec)…75 (614 msec)
42 (350 milliseconds)
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls
Enable
Selection
Disable
✓
7-32
Programming Tables
7 Programming Tables
Outside line no.
Default: All
1
2
3
6
*
4
5
[422]
Disconnect Time
0.5
Selection (seconds)
1.5
✓
4.0
[423] Outside (CO) Line
Ringing Pattern Selection
Single
Selection
Double
✓
Triple
[424] Reverse (Polarity)
Circuit Assignment
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[500] DISA Incoming Dialing Mode Selection
Selection
Default
Change
Without AA
✓
With AA
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant
Selection
Jack: Extension jack no. (01…24) GRP: Extension group no. (1…8)
All: Not stored
Auto attendant no.
Default
0
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
8
9
Programming Tables
7-33
7 Programming Tables
Selection
Default
Change
MODE 1
✓
[502]
OGM Mode Selection
MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5
[503]
FAX Connection
Extension jack no. (01…24) / Disable
Disable (Not assigned)
Selection
Default
Change
0 sec
[504]
DISA Delayed Answer Time
3 sec
✓
6 sec 12 sec 0 sec
[505]
DISA Waiting Time after OGM
5 sec
✓
10 sec 15 sec
Selection
Default
Change
[506]
DISA Busy Mode
Disconnect
✓
Call Waiting
[507] DISA
Intercept Mode
DISA 2 Intercept
✓
[508]
DISA Ringing Time before Intercept
Disconnect 10 sec 20 sec
✓
30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec
Selection
Default
Change
[509]
DISA Ringing Time after Intercept
10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec
✓
[510]
DISA No Dial Mode
Intercept
✓
DISA 1
Disconnect Intercept
✓
DISA 2
Disconnect
Selection
Default
Change
[511]
DISA Security Type
Trunk
✓
All None
[512]
DISA Security Codes
0…9, 4 digit
All codes : Not stored
CODE=01 CODE=02 CODE=03 CODE=04
Disable
[513]
Cyclic Tone Detection
2 Times 3 Times 4 Times
✓
Selection
Default
Change
[514] FAX
Tone Detection
1 Time
✓
2 Times
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA
3 sec
✓
6 sec 9 sec 1 sec
[517]
DISA AA Wait Time
2 sec
✓
3 sec 4 sec 5 sec
7-34
Programming Tables
7
Extension jack no.
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Programming Tables
Enable
✓
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment
Selection
Disable
Extension jack no.
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
21
22
23
24
*
Enable
Selection
Disable
Selection
Default
Change
[518] DISA Tone Selection after the Security Code
Enable
✓
Disable 0 sec
✓
[519]
DISA OGM Mute Time
2 sec 4 sec 6 sec
[520]
UCD Group
Extension group no. (1…8)
1
Selection
Default
Change
[521]
UCD Busy Waiting Time
01…32 minutes
10 minutes
[522]
UCD OGM Message Interval Time
30 sec 1 min
✓
1.5 min 2 min
[523]
UCD Busy Mode
Intercept
✓
Disconnect
Selection
Default
Change
[524]
UCD Intercept Mode
Intercept
✓
Disconnect 10 sec
[525]
UCD Ringing Time before Intercept
20 sec
✓
30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec
Selection
Default
Change
10 sec
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept
20 sec
✓
30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec
Programming Tables
7-35
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
1
✓
[601] TRS – Class of Service
Assignment — Day
COS no. (1…5)
2 3 4 5
[602] TRS – Class of Service
Assignment — Night
1
✓
COS no. (1…5)
2 3 4 5
[603] TRS – Class of Service
Assignment — Lunch
1
✓
COS no. (1…5)
2 3 4 5
7-36
Programming Tables
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
Option
✓
[605]
Account Code Entry Mode
Selection
Forced Verify-All Verify-Toll
[606] Call Transfer to an Outside (CO) Line
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[607] Call Forwarding to an Outside (CO) Line
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
Programming Tables
7-37
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
[608] Executive
Busy Override
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[609] Do Not
Disturb Override
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[610] Paralleled
Telephone Connection
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[611]
TAM Extension
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
7-38
Programming Tables
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
24
*
[612]
Room Monitor
Assignment
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[613] Outside (CO)
Line Duration Time
Limit Selection
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[614]
Internal Pulse
Detection
Enable
✓
Selection
Disable
[615]
LCD Language Assignment
English
✓
Selection
Spanish Portuguese
Programming Tables
7-39
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
E
✓
1
[700] Doorphone Ringing
Assignment — Day
D E
✓
2
D
[701] Doorphone Ringing
Assignment — Night
[702] Doorphone Ringing
Assignment — Lunch
E
✓
3
D E
✓
4
1…4: Doorphone no., E: Enable / D: Disable
1 2 3 4 1
D E
✓
D E
✓
D E
✓
D E
✓
D E
✓
D E
✓
2
D E
✓
3
D E
✓
4
D
7-40
Programming Tables
7 Programming Tables
Extension jack no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
*
16
17
18
19
1
E D
✓
[703] Door Opener
Assignment — Day
2
E D
✓
3
E D
✓
[704] Door Opener
Assignment — Night
1…4: Door opener no., E: Enable / D: Disable
4 1 2 3 4 1
E D
✓
E D
✓
E D
✓
E D
✓
E D
✓
E D
✓
[705] Door Opener
Assignment — Lunch
2
E D
✓
3
E D
✓
4
E D
✓
Doorphone no.
Default: All
1
2
3
4
*
Single
[706] Doorphone Ringing
/ Tone Pattern Selection
Selection
Double Triple
✓
S-Double
[707] Doorphone
Access Tone Selection
Enable
✓
Selection
Disable
[708] Doorphone
Ringing Time
15 sec
✓
Selection
30 sec
Programming Tables
7-41
7
Door opener no.
Default: All
1
2
3
4
*
1 sec
Programming Tables
2 sec
[709] Door Opener Time
3 sec 4 sec
Selection
5 sec
✓
6 sec 7 sec 8 sec
Selection
Default
Change
New line code
CR+LF
✓
CR 150
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters
300
Baud rate
600 1200 2400 4800 9600
✓
Word length
7 8
✓
Parity bit
Mark
✓
Space Even Odd None 1
✓
Stop bit
2
Page length
(4…99)
[801] SMDR Parameter
Default
Skip perforation
(0…95)
66
0
Selection
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing
Default
✓
Selection
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
On
Off
On
Off
Toll
✓
Selection
Default
Change
[803] Secret Speed Dialing /
One-Touch Dialing Printing
No Printing
✓
Printing
[805] SMDR Account
Code Selection
CODE
✓
INDEX
[806]
SMDR Language Assignment
English
✓
Spanish Portuguese
7-42
Programming Tables
169 mm (6
21
/
32
inch)
185 mm (7
9
/
32
inch)
92.5 mm (3
41
/
64
inch)
Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd.
1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Printed in Japan
PSQX1585XA
KF0998CM2069
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement